Kenmore 385.15358 Sewing Machine User`s guide

AI232
32-Port High Speed Asynchronous Line Card
User’s Guide
Version 9.6x
Part Number 232UM Rev 4
© 2008 by Kentrox, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 2008 by Kentrox, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The material discussed in this publication
is the proprietary property of Kentrox, Inc. Kentrox retains all rights to reproduction and
distribution of this publication.
Kentrox is a registered trademark of Kentrox, Inc. Applied Innovation, Applied Innovation Inc., the
AI logo, and other names are the intellectual property of Kentrox. All other product names are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Information published here is current as of this document’s date of publication, but is subject to
change without notice. You may verify product information by contacting our headquarters in
Oregon. Kentrox is an Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action employer.
Kentrox, Inc.
5800 Innovation Dr.
Dublin, Ohio USA 43016-3271
Toll Free: (800) 247-9482
International: +1 (614) 798-2000
Fax: +1 (614) 798-1770
20010 NW Tanasbourne Dr.
Hillsboro, Oregon USA 97124-7104
Toll Free: (800) 733-5511
Direct: (503) 643-1681
About this Document
This document explains how to install, configure, and operate the AI232 32-port high speed
asynchronous line card.
You should have a working knowledge of the following:
z
Your network
z
TCP/IP and Asynchronous Protocols
i
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
About this Document: Document Conventions
Document Conventions
Table 1 describes the text conventions used in this document.
Table 1 Document Conventions
Convention
Meaning
Screen Text, Menu Items,
System Prompts, Messages
and Reports
This style indicates configuration screen text, menu
items, system prompts, messages, and reports.
Static Command Text
In a command statement, this style indicates text that
should be entered exactly as shown at a command line.
Variable Command Text
In a command statement, this style indicates
user-specified text.
...
In a command statement, ellipses (...) signify that the
preceding parameter can be repeated a number of
times.
[ ]
In a command statement, square brackets indicate an
optional parameter. Two or more parameters in square
brackets with a vertical bar ( | ) between them indicate a
choice of optional parameters.
[ | ]
ii
{ | }
In a command statement, two or more parameters in
braces with a vertical bar ( | ) between them indicate a
choice of required parameters.
Menus and Menu
Commands
This style indicates menu and menu commands. A
vertical bar ( | ) separates the menus from the
submenus or menu commands. The vertical bar also
indicates the order in which you should click the menus,
submenus, and menu commands.
Dialog Boxes, Tabs,
Fields, Check Boxes,
and Command Buttons
This style indicates dialog boxes, tabs, fields, check
boxes, and command buttons.
Variable Field Text
This style indicates variable information you type in a
dialog box field.
KEYS
Uppercase body text indicates keys on a keyboard,
such as the TAB or ENTER keys. Keys used in
combination are connected with a plus symbol (+).
Labels
This style designates physical components on Kentrox
products such as jumpers, switches, and cable
connectors.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
About this Document: Document Conventions
Table 1 Document Conventions (Continued)
Convention
Note:
Important:
Tip:
CAUTION:
WARNING:
LASER DANGER:
Meaning
Note messages emphasize or supplement important
points of the main text.
Important messages provide information that is
essential to the completion of a task.
Tip messages provide information that assists users in
operating equipment more effectively.
Caution messages indicate that failure to take a
specified action could result in loss of data and/or harm
to the software or hardware.
Warning messages indicate that failure to take a
specified action could result in physical harm to the
user.
Laser danger messages indicate that failure to take a
specified action could result in eye damage or
blindness to the user due to overexposure to invisible
laser radiation.
iii
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
About this Document: Cautions and Warnings
Cautions and Warnings
Electrostatic Discharge Caution
CAUTION: Kentrox equipment and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive
components. Proper handling, shipping, and storage precautions must
be exercised:
z
You must remove and install cards in a static-free environment. Wear
an antistatic wrist strap that is plugged into the Kentrox equipment so
you are grounded at the same point as the equipment.
z
Do not remove cards from their antistatic plastic bags until you are
ready to install them into the chassis.
z
Immediately after you remove a card from the chassis, you must
insert it into its antistatic bag.
z
When the cards are not in use, keep them in their antistatic plastic
bags.
z
Do not ship or store cards near strong electrostatic, electromagnetic,
or radioactive fields.
Ground Caution
CAUTION: For Kentrox equipment to operate safely and correctly, there must be a
safety ground strap between the equipment ground bolts and the office
ground.
Proper Cooling Caution
ENSURE PROPER COOLING
CAUTION: When AI232 is installed into an AI180 AIswitch series 180 chassis, the
chassis must be equipped with the AIcool chassis cooling and Baffle-HS
heat baffle with sensor assemblies.
The AI180I AIswitch series 180 integrated chassis has a built-in fan and
baffle assembly and does not require additional assemblies.
iv
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
About this Document: Cautions and Warnings
FCC Warning
The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emitted radio
interference, and AI232 is constructed with this electromagnetic interference (EMI)
limitation in mind. AI232 is classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device, that
is, a device for use in commercial environments and not in residential areas. This
device has been tested and shown to comply with the following FCC rule: Part 15
Subpart J. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to
radio and TV reception, requiring the user to take whatever steps are necessary to
correct the interference.
Information is available from the FCC describing possible corrective actions. To
maintain low EMI levels, we suggest that you use only metal connectors and shielded
cable grounded to the frame.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
v
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
About this Document: Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance
Kentrox offers technical support 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
Before you contact Kentrox for assistance, please have the following information
available:
z
The type of hardware and software you are using
z
The error number and exact wording of any messages that appeared on your
screen
z
What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred
z
How you tried to solve the problem
Web Site Support
Support is available 24 hours a day using our Web site at:
http://www.kentrox.com
Email Support
Email support is available 24 hours a day. When you use email support, please be
sure to include the details of your problem within the email.
To contact Technical Support, send email to:
[email protected]
Phone Support
Phone support is available. When you call Kentrox for support, please be sure you
are at your computer and have the details of your problem available.
To contact Technical Support, call (866) 480-3571.
Kentrox Product Documentation
To order documentation, please contact your sales representative at
(800) 247-9482 or +1 (614) 798-2000.
You can also access and view the most current versions of Kentrox product
documentation on our Web site at:
http://www.kentrox.com
vi
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Product Description ..............................................................1-1
Features ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
Break Propagation ............................................................................................ 1-2
DCD/DSR/RTS/DTR Signal Lead Control ........................................................ 1-2
Dynamic Port Configuration ............................................................................. 1-2
IRB Connectivity ............................................................................................... 1-2
LAN/WAN Connectivity .................................................................................... 1-2
Modem Control ................................................................................................. 1-2
Performance Monitoring, Maintenance, Troubleshooting ................................. 1-2
SNMP Manageability ........................................................................................ 1-2
Standalone Configuration ................................................................................. 1-3
System Diagnostics .......................................................................................... 1-3
AI232 Hardware Components ...................................................................................... 1-4
Front Panel Components ................................................................................. 1-5
Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 1-6
Distribution Panels ....................................................................................................... 1-7
Model DP232-19/23 ......................................................................................... 1-7
Model DP232-RJ45 .......................................................................................... 1-9
Typical Applications ................................................................................................... 1-13
Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application ............................................................. 1-13
Modem Multiplexer Application ...................................................................... 1-14
Chapter 2: Using the AI198 Menu System .............................................2-1
Accessing the Menu System ........................................................................................ 2-2
Navigating the Menu System ....................................................................................... 2-3
Menu Numbering Structure .............................................................................. 2-3
Types of Menu Items ........................................................................................ 2-3
Exiting the Menu System ............................................................................................. 2-6
Chapter 3: AI232 Local Menu System ....................................................3-1
Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options ........................................................ 3-2
Multilevel User Name and Password Security ................................................. 3-2
RADIUS Authentication .................................................................................... 3-2
TACACS+ Authentication ................................................................................. 3-2
PPP Authentication Protocols (PAP and CHAP) .............................................. 3-3
TOC-1
Table of Contents
Logging Into AI232 ....................................................................................................... 3-4
Using a Telnet Connection for Login ................................................................ 3-4
Using an Asynchronous Port for Login ............................................................. 3-5
Accessing the Local Menu System .............................................................................. 3-7
Navigating the Local Menu System .............................................................................. 3-8
Identifying Types of Menu Items ...................................................................... 3-8
Accessing the Help Menu .......................................................................................... 3-10
Exiting the Local Menu System .................................................................................. 3-11
Chapter 4: System Configuration ...........................................................4-1
General System Properties Configuration .................................................................... 4-2
Destination Menu Break Sequence .................................................................. 4-2
Ethernet Port Settings ...................................................................................... 4-4
FTP Port ........................................................................................................... 4-5
IP Settings ........................................................................................................ 4-6
System Prompt ................................................................................................. 4-8
TCP Settings .................................................................................................... 4-9
Telnet Port ...................................................................................................... 4-10
RADIUS Configuration ............................................................................................... 4-12
Server Settings ............................................................................................... 4-12
Shell/FTP Options .......................................................................................... 4-14
TACACS+ Configuration ............................................................................................ 4-16
Server Settings ............................................................................................... 4-16
Shell/FTP Options .......................................................................................... 4-17
SNMP Configuration .................................................................................................. 4-19
Authentication Traps ...................................................................................... 4-19
Community Names ......................................................................................... 4-20
Contact Persons ............................................................................................. 4-22
Node Information ............................................................................................ 4-22
SNMP Manager .............................................................................................. 4-23
Static Route Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-25
IP Address Settings ........................................................................................ 4-25
TID to Modem Mux Configuration .............................................................................. 4-26
Inactivity Timeout ........................................................................................... 4-26
Initialization String .......................................................................................... 4-27
Port Bit Settings .............................................................................................. 4-28
TID to Route ................................................................................................... 4-29
Time Configuration ..................................................................................................... 4-31
Daylight Savings Time .................................................................................... 4-31
SNTP Settings ................................................................................................ 4-32
Time Zone ...................................................................................................... 4-33
TOC-2
Table of Contents
Chapter 5: Link Configuration ................................................................5-1
AI232 Link Types ......................................................................................................... 5-2
Asynchronous ................................................................................................... 5-2
Asynchronous PPP .......................................................................................... 5-2
Modem Multiplexer ........................................................................................... 5-3
Connect Options Configuration .................................................................................... 5-4
Alias .................................................................................................................. 5-4
Call Retry Interval ............................................................................................. 5-5
Connect String .................................................................................................. 5-6
Connection Settings ......................................................................................... 5-8
Link Application .............................................................................................. 5-10
Disconnect Options Configuration .............................................................................. 5-12
Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings .............................................................. 5-12
Disconnect Settings ........................................................................................ 5-14
Disconnect String ........................................................................................... 5-15
General Link Properties Configuration ....................................................................... 5-17
Auto Disable Error Limit ................................................................................. 5-17
Flow Control ................................................................................................... 5-18
Link Description .............................................................................................. 5-19
Link Number ................................................................................................... 5-20
Link State ....................................................................................................... 5-21
Link Type ........................................................................................................ 5-22
Port Data Bits ................................................................................................. 5-23
Port Parity ....................................................................................................... 5-24
Port Speed ..................................................................................................... 5-25
Port Stop Bits ................................................................................................. 5-27
Xon Repeat Interval ........................................................................................ 5-28
General PPP Properties Configuration ...................................................................... 5-30
IPCP Address Settings ................................................................................... 5-30
Maximum Unit Settings .................................................................................. 5-32
Network Control Protocol ............................................................................... 5-33
Modem Option Configuration ..................................................................................... 5-35
Modem String ................................................................................................. 5-35
Dialing Time-out Interval ................................................................................ 5-36
Number of Dial Attempts ................................................................................ 5-37
PPP Authentication Configuration .............................................................................. 5-39
Local Authentication Settings ......................................................................... 5-39
RAS Option .................................................................................................... 5-41
Remote Authentication Settings ..................................................................... 5-43
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration ........................................................................ 5-45
DTR State Configuration ................................................................................ 5-45
RTS State Configuration ................................................................................ 5-46
TOC-3
Table of Contents
Chapter 6: TID Multiplexing ....................................................................6-1
Overview ...................................................................................................................... 6-2
TID Multiplexing Configuration ..................................................................................... 6-4
Configuring the Parent Alias ............................................................................. 6-4
Configuring the Children Aliases ...................................................................... 6-7
Example Configurations ................................................................................. 6-10
TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 6-15
RTRV-HDR ..................................................................................................... 6-15
Diagnostics for TID Multiplexing ..................................................................... 6-17
Chapter 7: Alias and Call Routing Configuration ....................................7-1
Overview ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
Call Routing .................................................................................................................. 7-4
Configuring an Alias ......................................................................................... 7-4
Source/Destination Protocol Tables ................................................................. 7-9
Protocol Processing Modules ..................................................................................... 7-14
Module Types ................................................................................................. 7-14
Alias Macros ............................................................................................................... 7-19
Alias Macro Components ............................................................................... 7-19
Alias Macro Configuration .............................................................................. 7-24
Chapter 8: AI232 Commands .................................................................8-1
Commands Overview ................................................................................................... 8-2
Shell Commands .............................................................................................. 8-2
Shell Connections ............................................................................................ 8-2
winslc Commands ............................................................................................ 8-3
aaa account .................................................................................................................. 8-6
aaa authen ................................................................................................................... 8-7
aaa author .................................................................................................................... 8-8
aaa chpass ................................................................................................................... 8-9
aaa fallback ................................................................................................................ 8-10
aaa ppp authen .......................................................................................................... 8-11
aaa profile .................................................................................................................. 8-12
aaa retry ..................................................................................................................... 8-14
aaa stats ..................................................................................................................... 8-15
aaa summary ............................................................................................................. 8-17
aaa timeout ................................................................................................................ 8-19
alarm .......................................................................................................................... 8-20
arp .............................................................................................................................. 8-24
break .......................................................................................................................... 8-27
creset ......................................................................................................................... 8-29
date ............................................................................................................................ 8-30
TOC-4
Table of Contents
debug ......................................................................................................................... 8-31
delete ......................................................................................................................... 8-33
diag-conn ................................................................................................................... 8-34
diag-eth ...................................................................................................................... 8-36
diag-info ..................................................................................................................... 8-44
diag-line ...................................................................................................................... 8-52
diag-tconn .................................................................................................................. 8-55
dir ............................................................................................................................... 8-56
exit .............................................................................................................................. 8-57
head ........................................................................................................................... 8-58
help ............................................................................................................................ 8-59
id ................................................................................................................................ 8-60
ip ................................................................................................................................ 8-61
ip init ........................................................................................................................... 8-62
link .............................................................................................................................. 8-64
log .............................................................................................................................. 8-66
logout ......................................................................................................................... 8-67
ls ................................................................................................................................. 8-68
menu .......................................................................................................................... 8-69
modmux ..................................................................................................................... 8-70
more ........................................................................................................................... 8-72
panic ........................................................................................................................... 8-73
passwd ....................................................................................................................... 8-74
ping ............................................................................................................................ 8-75
pppstatus .................................................................................................................... 8-76
profile ......................................................................................................................... 8-78
pvclist ......................................................................................................................... 8-80
reset ........................................................................................................................... 8-82
router .......................................................................................................................... 8-83
selcnf .......................................................................................................................... 8-85
sholog ......................................................................................................................... 8-86
show ........................................................................................................................... 8-87
staeia .......................................................................................................................... 8-89
standalone .................................................................................................................. 8-91
staslc .......................................................................................................................... 8-92
syncflash .................................................................................................................... 8-94
tacacs info .................................................................................................................. 8-95
tacacs server .............................................................................................................. 8-96
tacacs server ip .......................................................................................................... 8-97
tacacs server phase ................................................................................................... 8-98
tacacs server port ..................................................................................................... 8-100
tacacs server secret ................................................................................................. 8-101
TOC-5
Table of Contents
tacacs server summary ............................................................................................ 8-102
tacacs sholog ........................................................................................................... 8-104
tacacs stats .............................................................................................................. 8-105
tail ............................................................................................................................. 8-107
tcpoutconn ................................................................................................................ 8-108
telnet ........................................................................................................................ 8-109
tftp ............................................................................................................................ 8-110
tftpboot ..................................................................................................................... 8-112
timezone ................................................................................................................... 8-114
type .......................................................................................................................... 8-116
update ...................................................................................................................... 8-117
uptime ...................................................................................................................... 8-118
useradd .................................................................................................................... 8-119
userdel ..................................................................................................................... 8-121
users ........................................................................................................................ 8-122
who ........................................................................................................................... 8-123
xon-interval ............................................................................................................... 8-124
Appendix A: AI232 Crash Codes .......................................................... A-1
Crash Codes ................................................................................................................A-2
Common Crash Codes .....................................................................................A-2
AI232 Crash Codes ..........................................................................................A-3
System Failure Crash Reports .........................................................................A-4
Kentrox Technical Support ...........................................................................................A-5
Appendix B: Standalone Mode and Switch Mode ................................. B-1
Standalone Mode .........................................................................................................B-2
Downloading Software for a Standalone AI232 ................................................B-2
Configuring BOOTP/TFTP ...............................................................................B-3
Switch Mode .................................................................................................................B-4
Downloading Software for AI232 in Switch Mode ............................................B-4
Appendix C: Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements .. C-1
AI232 Commands ........................................................................................................C-2
AI232 Menu Aliases .....................................................................................................C-3
FTP Sessions ...............................................................................................................C-4
TOC-6
1
Product Description
This chapter provides an overview of the AI232 32-port high speed asynchronous line card.
Guide to this Chapter
Features
AI232 Hardware Components
Technical Specifications
Distribution Panels
Typical Applications
1-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Features
Features
AI232 is a high-performance asynchronous network interface card used in an
AIswitch. AI232 includes the following features:
Break Propagation
AI232 supports break handling from one end of a connection to another end
regardless of the protocols used for data transport. Refer to Chapter 7: Alias and Call
Routing Configuration for details about available types of break handling.
DCD/DSR/RTS/DTR Signal Lead Control
AI232 supports user selectable disconnect on DCD low, DCD high-to-low transition,
DSR low, and DSR high-to-low transition. Additionally, AI232 allows for user
selectable connection control of DTR/RTS.
Dynamic Port Configuration
AI232 allows for configuration changes on a per port basis without resetting the card.
IRB Connectivity
AI232 communicates with other cards in the same chassis over an internal repeater
bus. It cannot communicate over the backplane with line cards that do not use the
IRB.
LAN/WAN Connectivity
AI232 supports communications with other TCP/IP devices in a LAN/WAN
environment.
Modem Control
AI232 provides full modem control and is configurable for auto-answer or dial-modem
modes.
Performance Monitoring, Maintenance, Troubleshooting
Shell and winslc commands let users handle performance monitoring, maintenance,
and troubleshooting for AI232.
SNMP Manageability
AI232 supports configuration using SNMP as well as monitoring. SNMP traps are
generated by AI232 and are sent to all the management stations that exist in the trap
table.
1-2
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Features
Standalone Configuration
AI232 operates as a standalone card when it is installed in the AIswitch series 110
chassis. Standalone mode lets AI232 function without dependence on AI198 for
configuration and management. Refer to Appendix B: Standalone Mode and Switch
Mode for more details.
System Diagnostics
AI232 lets users view diagnostic data on existing connections and internal information
about serial links. For more information about viewing system diagnostics, refer to
sections:
z
diag-conn on page 8-34
z
diag-eth on page 8-36
z
diag-info on page 8-44
z
diag-line on page 8-52
z
diag-tconn on page 8-55.
1-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: AI232 Hardware Components
AI232 Hardware Components
AI232 has four high-density connectors that provide 32 EIA-232-E asynchronous
ports that support speeds up to and including 115 Kilobits per second. All ports have
modem control for host or modem applications and can be used to connect user
terminals, personal computers, modems, and other high-speed asynchronous ports.
AI232 can also be used as a high-speed terminal server that handles asynchronous
to TCP/IP conversions. A distribution panel is required to serve as a physical interface
for AI232.
CAUTION: AIswitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components.
Exercise proper handling, shipping, and storage precautions.
1-4
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: AI232 Hardware Components
Front Panel Components
Figure 1-1 displays the AI232 front panel components.
DC OK LED
Illuminates green when +5 Volts is
present.
FAULT LED
Illuminates red if the card fails.
PORTS 25-32 Connector
Connects ports 25 to 32 to the
distribution panel.
PORTS 17-24 Connector
Connects ports 17 to 24 to the
distribution panel.
PORTS 9-16 Connector
Connects ports 9 to 16 to the distribution
panel.
PORTS 1-8 Connector
Connects ports 1 to 8 to the distribution
panel.
ACT LED
Illuminates green when the card is
transmitting or receiving packets.
LINK LED
Illuminates green when valid link
integrity pulses are being received.
COL LED
Illuminates red when collisions are
detected.
10BASET Connector
Specifies the external 10BaseT port
connector.
DC OK
FAULT
PORTS
25-32
PORTS
17-24
PORTS
9-16
AC
T
LI
N
C K
O
L
PORTS
1-8
AI232
10
B
A
S
E
T
Figure 1-1
AI232
1-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 1-1 lists the AI232 technical specifications.
Table 1-1 Technical Specifications
1-6
Component
Description
10BaseT
Ethernet port on the AI232 front panel.
High Density SCSI
32 asynchronous, EIA-232-E (individual ports are accessed
by using a distribution panel)
Port Speed
300 bps to 115 Kbps
Installation
Requires one slot in an AIswitch (can be hot swapped)
Current Draw
2.0 A, maximum
Compliance
For use with AI UL listed AIswitch Series Chassis
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Distribution Panels
Distribution Panels
Distribution panels provide a physical interface for AI232. The following distribution
panel models and interfaces are available:
z
Model DP232-19/23 (16 DB-25/EIA-232-E interfaces)
z
Model DP232-RJ45 (32 RJ-45/EIA-232-E interfaces)
Model DP232-19/23
This distribution panel provides 16 DB-25/EIA-232-E interfaces for AI232. To access
all 32 ports on AI232, two distribution panels are required. The distribution panel is
available in two sizes for 19-inch or 23-inch rack installations. Figure 1-2 displays the
distribution panel and Table 1-2 lists the specifications.
Connect to Network Elements
(16 ports)
Connect to the AI232
PORT 1/17
PORT 5/21
PORT 9/25
PORT 13/29
PORT 2/18
PORT 6/22
PORT 10/26
PORT 14/30
PORT 3/19
PORTS
1-8
PORT 4/20
PORT 7/23
DP232
PORT 11/27
APPLIED INNOVATION INC.
COPYRIGHT 1999
PORT 8/24
PORTS
9 - 16
PORT 12/28
PORT 15/31
PORT 16/32
Figure 1-2 DP232-19/23 Distribution Panel
Table 1-2 Specifications for DP232-19/23
Description
Specification
Mounting
DP232-19: mounts to a 19-inch rack
DP232-23: mounts to a 23-inch rack
I/O Ports
16 DB-25/EIA-232-E interfaces
Weight (approximately)
2.5 lb (1.12 kg)
Size
Height: 4 in. (10.16 cm)
Width: 19 in. (48.26 cm)/23 in. (58.42 cm)
Depth: 1.12 in. (2.84 cm)
1-7
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Distribution Panels
Table 1-2 Specifications for DP232-19/23 (Continued)
Description
Specification
Pin Assignments
Pin 1
Pin 13
Cables
z
z
1-8
Pin 14
Pin 25
Pin
Signal
2
TXD
3
RXD
4
RTS
5
CTS
6
DSR
7
Signal
GND
8
DCD
CAB467: Connects one connector (8 ports) on the
AI232 to the distribution panel. Each distribution
panel requires two cables.
CAB469: Connects network elements to the
individual connectors on the distribution panel.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Distribution Panels
Installation Procedure
1. Install the distribution panel(s) on the rack. Figure 1-3 on page 1-9 displays a
typical installation.
2. Attach cables from AI232 to the distribution panel.
DP232-19/23
Cable: CAB467
(4 places)
PORT 1
PORT 5
PORT 9
PORT 2
PORT 6
PORT 10
PORT 7
PORT 11
PORT 4
PORT 8
PORT 12
PORT 16
PORT 1
PORT 5
PORT 9
PORT 13
PORT 2
PORT 6
PORT 10
PORT 7
PORT 11
PORT 8
PORT 12
PORT 3
PORTS
1-8
PORT 3
PORTS
1-8
PORT 4
PORT 13
PORT 14
PORTS
9 - 16
PORT 15
PORT 14
PORTS
9 - 16
PORT 15
PORT 16
-
-
AI232
(AI180 Chassis)
Figure 1-3 Typical Installation
Model DP232-RJ45
This model provides 32 RJ-45/EIA-232-E interfaces for AI232. Reversible mounting
flanges allow for installation to a 19-inch or 23-inch rack. Figure 1-4 displays the
distribution panel and Table 1-3 lists the specifications.
Connect to Network Elements
(32 ports)
1
4
Connect to the AI232
(4 places)
5
8
9
12
PORTS 1 - 8
16
29
32
DP232-RJ45
WWW.AIINET.COM
PORTS 17 - 24
17
13
PORTS 9 - 16
20
PORTS 25 - 32
21
24
25
28
Figure 1-4 DP232-RJ45 Distribution Panel
1-9
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Distribution Panels
Table 1-3 Specifications for DP232-RJ45
Description
Specification
Mounting
Mounts to a 19-inch or 23-inch rack
I/O Ports
32 RJ-45 ports
Weight (approximately)
4.8 lb (2.16 kg)
Size
Height: 2 in. (5.08 cm)
Width: 16.9 in. (42.92 cm) without mounting flanges
Depth: 3.5 in. (8.89 cm)
Pin Assignments
Cables
1-10
Pin 1
Pin 8
Pin
Signal
1
RTS
2
DTR
3
TXD
4
DCD
5
RXD
6
GND
7
DSR
8
CTS
CAB467—Connects one connector (8 ports) on the
AI232 to the distribution panel. The distribution panel
requires four cables.
CAB513—An RJ45 to DB25 null cable that connects
network elements to the individual connectors on the
distribution panel (straight through applications).
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Distribution Panels
Installation Procedure
1. Attach the mounting flanges and tie bar as shown in Figure 1-5. (Table 1-4 shows
the part list.)
2. Install the distribution panel to the rack. Figure 1-6 shows a typical installation.
1
4
5
8
9
12
PORTS 1 - 8
13
16
29
32
PORTS 9 - 16
DP232-RJ45
WWW.AIINET.COM
PORTS 17 - 24
17
PORTS 25 - 32
20
21
24
25
28
Setting flanges for a 19-inch rack
Setting flanges for a 23-inch rack
Install the mounting flanges in
the desired location
Install the mounting flanges in
the desired location
4
4
5
1
5
1
3
3
Figure 1-5 DP232-RJ45 Distribution Panel
Table 1-4 Parts List
Item
Description
Part No.
Quantity
1
Tie Bar
06-410-002
1
2
Mounting Flange (left side)
06-110-003
1
3
Mounting Flange (right side)
06-110-005
1
4
#6-32 Screw with lockwasher
00-018-001
6
5
#12-24 Screw with lockwasher
00-015-003
2
1-11
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Distribution Panels
Cable: CAB467
(4 places)
DP232-RJ45
1
4
5
8
9
12
PORTS 1 - 8
17
13
16
29
32
PORTS 9 - 16
DP232-RJ45
WWW.AIINET.COM
20
PORTS 17 - 24
21
24 25
28
PORTS 25 - 32
-
-
AI232
(AI180 Chassis)
Figure 1-6 Typical Installation
1-12
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Typical Applications
Typical Applications
AI232 is used primarily for connecting to asynchronous network elements and
modems. The following applications are discussed in this section:
z
Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application
z
Modem Multiplexer Application
Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application
Figure 1-7 illustrates an asynchronous to TCP/IP application.
Trunking and
Element Serving
AI
AI
TCP/IP
Ethernet
Operational
Operational
Support System
2
2
9
3
6
2
Asynchronous
Async
NE
Async
Asynchronous
NE
Asynchronous
Async
NE
Figure 1-7 Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application
The following events occur in Figure 1-7:
z
The OSS sends TCP/IP calls to AI232.
z
AI232 routes the TCP/IP calls to an asynchronous NE using an asynchronous
port.
1-13
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Product Description: Typical Applications
Modem Multiplexer Application
Figure 1-8 illustrates a modem multiplexer application.
TCP/IP
Operational
Support System
AI
Modem
2
3
2
Modem
Ethernet
NE
Modem
NE
Modem
NE
Modem
Serial
Links
Modem
Packet Switched
Telephone Network
Figure 1-8 Modem Multiplexer Application
The following events occur in Figure 1-8:
z
The OSS sends a TCP/IP call to AI232.
z
AI232 routes the TCP/IP call over a serial link to one of several available modems
in a modem pool. When a call comes in that requires a modem, one is selected
from the pool and dials out appropriately. For information on configuring the
modem pool and modem selection for incoming calls, refer to the Modem Mux
configuration menu.
Note: Round-robin dialing has been incorporated for ModMux links to balance
the demand placed on available modems by incoming calls. Rather than
always starting at the first available modem, the ModMux driver rotates
through all available modems so that the first available one is not always
the first to be dialed.
1-14
z
The modem routes the call through the PSTN (packet switched telephone
network) to a remote modem.
z
The remote modem sends the call to an NE.
2
Using the AI198 Menu System
This chapter provides information on starting, ending, and navigating through an AI198 menu
system session.
Guide to this Chapter
Accessing the Menu System
Navigating the Menu System
Exiting the Menu System
2-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Using the AI198 Menu System: Accessing the Menu System
Accessing the Menu System
To access the AI198 menu system:
1. Log into AI198.
2. At the prompt, enter menu. The Main Menu appears.
>menu
Main Menu
01+Configure options affecting the system as a whole
02+Create, delete, or modify a destination name
03+Display all destination names
04+Configure cards
05+Set or remove connection restrictions based on port numbers
06+Display all connection restrictions
07+Configure slot density
08+Configure the alias translation table
09+Display the list of alias translation entries
10+Configure the BOOTP table
21 Exit the configuration menu system
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
2-2
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System
Navigating the Menu System
Menu Numbering Structure
All menus accessed from the Main Menu are identified with a numerical reference at
the top right corner of the menu screen. This numerical reference specifies the
location within the menu system. Each digit in the menu number represents a menu
item that was previously selected. For example, Menu 4.2 indicates that menu item 4
and 2 were selected.
>2
Menu 4.2
01 Configure as Empty Slot
02+Configure as AI183/AI185 standard 4/16 port card
03+Configure as AI193/194 Ethernet card with slot expansion of----04+Configure as AI192/196 X.25 network card with slot expansion of-------05+Configure as ASP or Advanced Smart Line Card with slot expansion of-------06 Configure as AI196-I network card with LocalView
07 Configure as AI2524 Router card
08 Configure as AI294 Ethernet Switch card
09+Configure as AI196-I network interface card with menu support
10 Configure as Independent Smart Line Card
11+Configure as AI296 network interface card
12+Configure as AI192/196 with full menu support and slot expansion of-------13+Configure as AI285 network interface card
14+Configure as AI232 network interface card
15 Configure as AI Modem
16 Configure as AIFlex Fiber LAN Extender Card
17 Configure as AI120 Card
18 Configure as AIE1 Card
19 Configure as AITC Card
20 Next Page
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
Types of Menu Items
The following four types of menu items are available:
z
Submenus
z
Toggles
z
Data
z
Functions
Submenus
Submenus go to deeper levels in the menu hierarchy. They provide additional
configuration menus. Menu items that contain submenus have a plus sign (+) next to
their menu item number. In this example, menu item 02 will display a submenu.
2-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System
02+Configure as AI232 network interface card
Some submenus require a selection from a list and then re-display the previous menu
showing the selection. Other submenus have their own submenus that request
additional information. After saving the entries, the top-level menu re-appears.
Toggles
Toggles display two or more values that can be selected for a parameter. Toggles
have an asterisk (*) next to their menu item number. Entering the menu item number
toggles to the next selection.
In this example, menu items 06 and 07 are toggles.
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF
For 06*TCP Default Window Size, the user can toggle between values 200, 512, 1024, and
2048. For 07*TCP Send Ahead, the user can toggle between ON and OFF.
Data
Data menu items request text entries (such as destination names and card
descriptions) or numeric values (such as port numbers and IP addresses). To enter
information in a data menu item, enter the menu item number followed by a comma
(or a space) and the configuration information.
In this example, the menu item requires an IP address entry.
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------000.000.000.000
To enter an IP address of 172.016.002.043, enter the following:
1,172.016.002.043
The menu re-appears with the entered IP address.
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------172.016.002.043
To change configuration data that has been entered for a menu item, enter the menu
item number followed by a comma and the new data.
Tip: To change a typed entry, use BACKSPACE to back up to the desired position in
the text and retype the changes. However, once the user presses ENTER,
changes can be made only by selecting that menu item and re-entering the
data.
2-4
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System
Functions
Menu item functions appear at the bottom of each menu. This example displays menu
items that can appear and Table 2-1 describes them.
17 Display first page
18 Next page
19 Delete entry
20 Save the changes made
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
Table 2-1 Menu Item Descriptions
Menu Item
Description
17
Displays the first page of a menu.
18
Displays additional pages of a menu.
19
Deletes information for a specified entry.
20
Saves the entered information and re-displays the previous related
menu.
Important: Configuration entries take effect only after every screen
has been saved going back to the main menu.
21
Exits a menu without saving changes. All items on the menu return to
the previously configured values.
2-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Using the AI198 Menu System: Exiting the Menu System
Exiting the Menu System
To exit the menu system:
1. Access the Main Menu.
2. Enter 21. The command prompt appears.
2-6
3
AI232 Local Menu System
This chapter provides information on the configuration and navigation of the AI232 menu system.
This system offers on-board configuration capabilities similar to those available in the AI198
menu system. The AI232 menu system is available when the card is operating in both switch
mode and standalone mode.
Guide to this Chapter
Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options
Logging Into AI232
Accessing the Local Menu System
Navigating the Local Menu System
Accessing the Help Menu
Exiting the Local Menu System
3-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options
Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options
AI232 has a variety of security options, including:
z
Multilevel User Name and Password Security
z
RADIUS Authentication
z
TACACS+ Authentication
z
PPP Authentication Protocols (PAP and CHAP)
Multilevel User Name and Password Security
Up to 10 configurable user account profiles can be assigned to an AI232 user. Five
system profiles are available for providing various levels of user access. For more
information about user profiles, refer to command profile on page 1-103.
RADIUS Authentication
RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in
a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server. A primary and secondary
RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire AI232
network. AI232 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet, asynchronous, and
synchronous ports. For more information on RADIUS authentication, refer to section
RADIUS Configuration on page 1-19.
TACACS+ Authentication
TACACS+ authentication verifies user login information against the user’s permission
level on a TACACS+ server. Up to 9 TACACS+ servers are configurable to provide
secure access for an entire AI232 network. AI232 TACACS+ authentication is
available for Telnet, asynchronous, and FTP connections. For more information on
TACACS+ authentication and server configuration, refer to the following commands:
3-2
z
aaa authen on page 8-7
z
tacacs server on page 8-96
z
aaa author on page 8-8
z
tacacs server phase on page 8-98
z
aaa fallback on page 8-10
z
tacacs server ip on page 8-97
z
aaa timeout on page 8-19
z
tacacs server port on page 8-100
z
aaa ppp authen on page 8-11
z
tacacs server secret on page 8-101
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options
PPP Authentication Protocols (PAP and CHAP)
All asynchronous and synchronous PPP links are configurable to use either PAP or
CHAP PPP authentication protocols. PAP establishes peer identity using a 2-way
handshake that is done only upon initial link establishment. CHAP performs a 3-way
handshake upon initial link establishment, then proceeds to verify the link with 3-way
handshakes at random intervals. CHAP also encrypts the user’s password over the
PPP link to provide added security.
3-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI232
Logging Into AI232
Log into AI232 with a Telnet connection or with any of AI232’s asynchronous ports
that are configured as Login ports.
Note:
ai is the default user ID and password. AI232 prompts you to create a new
user ID and password after the fifth login with the default values. Refer to
command useradd on page 8-119 to create a new user ID and password.
Using a Telnet Connection for Login
Logging in using a Telnet connection requires that AI232 has a configured IP address.
If an IP address has not been configured, refer to Chapter 4: System Configuration to
assign an IP address.
To log into AI232 using a Telnet connection:
1. Power on AI232.
2. Connect the Ethernet network connection to the 10BaseT port on the front panel
of AI232.
3. Telnet to AI232. The login prompt appears.
Note:
is the default user ID and password. There are five grace period logins.
If after the fifth login a new ID and password have not been created, AI232
prompts you to create a user ID and password. Use the useradd
command described in Chapter 8: AI232 Commands to create a user ID
and password.
ai
4. Enter your user ID. The password prompt appears.
5. Enter your password. The destination menu appears. You are now logged into
AI232.
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+
server during authentication:
login: test
Password:
Contacting TACACS+ server.
3-4
Please wait.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI232
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+
server during authentication, but the contact attempt fails:
login: test
Password:
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.
TACACS+ server(s) not responding.
Note: Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log
message saying that the login failed. Also, an entry appears in the log file with
text stating Warning: x consecutive failed login attempts where x is the number
of consecutive failed login attempts.
Using an Asynchronous Port for Login
Two tools are required for logging into AI232 using an asynchronous port:
z
A PC with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal (included with
Windows 95/98/2000/XP) or ProComm.
z
Terminal cable with these specifications: null (RS232) cable with DB25 male
connector for AI232 distribution panel connection and appropriate connector for
your PC.
To log into AI232 using an asynchronous port:
1. Set the terminal emulation software to the following settings:
z
9600 baud
z
No parity
z
Eight data bits
z
One stop bit
2. Power on AI232.
3. Connect a PC to port 1 on the DP232 distribution panel.
Note: Link 1 on AI232 is enabled and configured for login by default, which
allows access through the link. AI232 may also be accessed through any
asynchronous link that is enabled and configured for login.
4. Press ENTER. The login prompt appears.
5. Enter your user ID. The password prompt appears.
6. Enter your password. The destination menu appears. You are now logged into
AI232.
3-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI232
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+
server during authentication:
login: test
Password:
Contacting TACACS+ server.
Please wait.
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+
server during authentication, but the contact attempt fails:
login: test
Password:
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.
TACACS+ server(s) not responding.
Note: Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log
message saying that login failed. Also, a new entry will appear in the log
file with text stating Warning: x consecutive failed login attempts where x is
the number of consecutive failed login attempts.
3-6
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Accessing the Local Menu System
Accessing the Local Menu System
To access the AI232 menu session:
1. Log into AI232. Refer to section Logging Into AI232 on page 3-4 for more
information.
2. At the destination menu, enter ai. The AI232 shell prompt appears.
3. Enter menu. The AI232 Main Menu appears.
AI232 Main Menu
+ Link Menu
+ Alias Menu
+ System Menu
+ Static Route Menu
....................................................................
:
:
: Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key. :
: Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue.
:
:..................................................................:
<F1> Help
<F4> Close
Note: The Alias Menu is only available when you log into AI232 in standalone mode.
3-7
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Navigating the Local Menu System
Navigating the Local Menu System
Arrow keys and keyboard short cuts can be used to navigate through the local menu
system. Refer to Table 3-1 for a list of arrow key movements and keyboard shortcuts.
Note: To use the arrow keys in the menu system, make sure the VT100 arrow keys
are enabled in either your Telnet settings or your terminal emulation program.
Table 3-1 Direction Keys
Direction
Keys
Up
Use the up arrow key or Press <Ctrl-p>
Down
Use the down arrow key or Press <Ctrl-n>
Right
Use the right arrow key or Press <Ctrl-f>
Left
Use the left arrow key or Press <Ctrl-b>
Identifying Types of Menu Items
The AI232 local menu system contains data items that let you input information or
toggle between available selections.
Data Entry Items
The following screen shot displays an example of a data entry menu item:
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To enter information for a data entry menu item:
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.
Note: If the selected menu item has a range of valid values, that range will
appear in the bottom right of the screen.
2. Enter your data.
To erase existing data for a data entry menu item:
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.
2. Delete the data using BACKSPACE or DELETE and press ENTER.
OR
Enter new data.
3-8
1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Navigating the Local Menu System
To save your changes:
z
Press F2 (or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight [Send]) and ENTER.
z
Enter y to save. If an error message appears, check your work and make changes
as necessary.
z
Press CTRL-E to save data entries immediately without being queried to save. If
an error message appears, check your work and make changes as necessary.
Toggle Items
The following screen shot displays an example of a toggle menu item. The selected
option has brackets around it.
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Up]
Down
To select a value for a toggle menu item:
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.
2. Highlight the option you want to select and press ENTER. The brackets move to
that option.
To save your changes:
z
Press F2 (or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight [Send]) and ENTER.
z
Enter y to save. If an error message appears, check your work and make changes
as necessary.
z
Press CTRL-E to save data entries immediately without being queried to save. If
an error message appears, check your work and make changes as necessary.
3-9
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Accessing the Help Menu
Accessing the Help Menu
The AI232 help menu lists all available keyboard codes and function keys with their
associated purposes. The help menu can be accessed by doing one of the following
things:
z
Pressing F1 and ENTER
z
Selecting Help on the menu and ENTER
z
Pressing ESC-1 and ENTER.
The following example displays the first page of the local menu system help screen:
Navigation Help
Page 1 of 4
This screen displays when you press the <F1> key or if you enter an invalid keystroke from the Main Menu. The following keyboard function keys are programmed
to allow you to enter or change data in menus:
<F1>;
<F2>;
<F4>;
UP Arrow;
DOWN Arrow;
LEFT Arrow;
RIGHT Arrow
If you can not locate these keys on your keyboard, use the following keyboard
equivalent codes to provide the same functionality:
Keyboard Code Function Key
Purpose
Esc
1
<F1>
HELP - displays this help screen from any menu.
Esc
2
<F2>
SEND - transmits the currently displayed data. You
are given a confirmation prompt before the actual
transmittal of data occurs. When you press the <F2>
key, the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys can then be used
to access the other commands.
Press SPACE BAR to continue, or 'q' to quit
3-10
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Exiting the Local Menu System
Exiting the Local Menu System
To exit the local menu system and save all changes:
1. Select <F2>
Send
and press ENTER.
The following prompt appears:
Save changes? (y/n)
2. Save the changes:
y
3. Select <F4>
Close
and press ENTER until you are out of the menu system.
To exit the local menu system without saving changes, execute step 3.
Note: Entering <CTRL> + R takes you directly to the main menu.
3-11
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Local Menu System: Exiting the Local Menu System
3-12
4
System Configuration
This chapter provides information on configuring AI232 system settings with the AI198 menu
system and the AI232 local menu system. To configure AI232 with the AI198 menu system, the
AI198 software must be at version 1.90 or later. The AI198 menu system settings take effect only
when AI232 is operating in switch mode (non-standalone mode).
Guide to this Chapter
General System Properties Configuration
RADIUS Configuration
TACACS+ Configuration
SNMP Configuration
Static Route Configuration
TID to Modem Mux Configuration
Time Configuration
4-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
General System Properties Configuration
General system properties are configurable at the first level of the AI198 and AI232
System menu. The following menu items can be configured:
z
Destination Menu Break Sequence
z
Ethernet Port Settings
z
FTP Port
z
IP Settings
z
System Prompt
z
TCP Settings
z
Telnet Port
Destination Menu Break Sequence
Description
This menu item sets the character sequence that lets the user exit a connection from
the destination menu.
Format
Destination menu break sequences take the following format:
attention_keystroke [ delay_start, delay_end ] next_character
4-2
attention_keystroke
Defines the keystroke that indicates that a break
sequence is coming. Valid values are:
z <x> where x represents the decimal ASCII value
of the keystroke. For example, enter <9> to
represent the TAB key.
z <c>x where <c> represents the CTRL key and x
represents the actual key name. For example,
enter <c>^ to represent CTRL+SHIFT+6.
z <c><x> where <c> represents the CTRL key and
x represents the decimal ASCII value of the
actual key name. For example, enter <c><9> to
represent CTRL+TAB.
delay_start
Defines the amount of time (in seconds) you must
wait before entering the next character. Valid values
are integers from 0 to 8.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
delay_end
Defines the amount of time (in seconds) before which
you must enter the next character. Valid values are
integers from 1 to 9.
Note: If you do not enter the next character within
the configured time frame, then both the
attention_keystroke and next_character
values are treated as data and forwarded.
next_character
Defines the next character in the sequence. Valid
values are:
z <x> where x represents the decimal ASCII value
of the keystroke. For example, enter <9> to
represent the TAB key.
z <c>x where <c> represents the CTRL key and x
represents the actual key name. For example,
enter <c>^ to represent CTRL+SHIFT+6.
z <c><x> where <c> represents the CTRL key and
x represents the decimal ASCII value of the
actual key name. For example, enter <c><9> to
represent CTRL+TAB.
Note: You can include multiple characters with delays between each in the break
sequence. For example, <c>^[1,5]x[0,9]k is a valid entry.
Menu Item Type
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14 pg 2.
2. From Menu 4.2.14 pg 2, enter 3, and the desired destination menu break
sequence. The maximum length is 44 characters. The default is <c>^[1,5]x.
This example displays item 03
<c>^[2,6]x.
Destination Menu Break Sequence
configured as
>3,<c>^[2,6]x
Menu 4.2.14 pg 2
01*10 Base T Ethernet-------------------------------------------------------OFF
02+Radius Configuration Menu
03 Destination Menu Break Sequence-----------------------------------<c>^[2,6]x
4-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the System Menu.
2. Enter a character sequence for Destination
is 44 characters. The default is <c>^[1,5]x.
Menu Break Sequence.
The following example displays item Destination
Maximum length
Menu Break Sequence
set to <c><33>.
System Menu
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>
Ethernet Port Settings
Description
The Ethernet port settings are configured using two menu items:
z
10BaseT Ethernet—Enables
or disables the 10BaseT Ethernet port on the front
panel of AI232.
z
Dual Ethernet—Enables
or disables simultaneous operation of the faceplate
mounted 10BaseT Ethernet port and the IRB.
Note: When the dual Ethernet setting is enabled, the 10BaseT Ethernet setting
has no effect on AI232 operation.
Menu Item Type
Toggle for both menu items
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14 pg 2.
2. For 01*10
Base T Ethernet,
3. For 07*Dual
Ethernet,
enter 1 to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.
enter 7 to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.
This example displays 01*10
Base T Ethernet
set to ON and 07*Dual
Ethernet
set to OFF.
>7
Menu 4.2.14 pg 2
01*10 Base T Ethernet------------------------------------------------------- ON
02+Radius Configuration Menu
03 Destination Menu Break Sequence-----------------------------------<c>^[1,5]x
04+TACACS Configuration Menu
05 TCP Outgoing Connection Timer (2-360s)-----------------------------------075
06+TID to Modem Mux Configuration Menu
07*Dual Ethernet (On, Off)--------------------------------------------------OFF
4-4
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the System Menu.
2. For 10 Base T Ethernet, select Off or On. The default is off when running in switch
mode. The default is on when running in standalone mode.
3. For Dual
Ethernet,
select Off or On. The default is Off.
This example displays 10
Base T Ethernet
set to ON and Dual
Ethernet
set to OFF.
System Menu
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .
[200]
512
1024
2048
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23
FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 21
10 Base T Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off
[On]
Dual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Off]
On
FTP Port
Description
This menu item sets the FTP server port number.
Menu Item Type
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.
2. For 16 FTP port number, enter 16, and the FTP server port number. Valid values are
1 to 65534. The default is 21.
4-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
This example displays 16
FTP port number
set to 220.
>16,220
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------000.000.000.000
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.255.254
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------000.000.000.000
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF
08+SNMP System Parameters
12+Link Setup
14+IP Static Routes
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00023
16 FTP port number (1..65534)---------------------------------------------00220
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the System Menu.
2. For FTP
Port,
enter the desired FTP port value. Valid values are from 0 to 65534.
This example displays FTP
Port
set to 1752.
System Menu
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .
[200]
512
1024
2048
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23
FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752
IP Settings
Description
The IP settings are configurable using five menu items in the CLC menu or via a shell
command on AI232. The configurable values are:
4-6
z
IP address
z
IP address range
z
IP subnet mask
z
Primary IP router address
z
Secondary IP router address.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
Menu Item Types
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.
2. For 01
IP Address,
enter 1, and the IP address for AI232. The default is
000.000.000.000.
3. For 02 IP Address Range, enter 2, and the number of the IP addresses to be
assigned to AI232. The valid range is 1 to 255.
4. For 03
IP Subnet Mask,
enter 3, and the IP subnet mask for AI232. The default is
255.255.255.254.
5. For 04 Primary IP Router Address, enter 4, and the IP address of the primary router
for AI232. The default is 000.000.000.000.
6. For 05 Secondary IP Router Address, enter 5, and the IP address of the secondary
router for AI232. The default is 000.000.000.000.
This example displays:
z
01 IP Address
z
02 IP Address Range
z
03
z
04
z
05
set to 10.38.49.12
set to 3
IP Subnet Mask set to 255.255.000.000
Primary IP Router Address set to 010.038.000.001
IP Router Address set to 010.038.000.002
>5,10.38.0.2
01
02
03
04
05
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1
IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.038.049.012
IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------003
IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000
Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.038.000.001
Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----010.038.000.002
Note: For information about configuring IP setting with shell commands, refer to
commands ip on page 8-61 and ip init on page 8-62.
4-7
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
System Prompt
Description
This item sets the system prompt value in the CLI.
Menu Item Type
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.
2. For 17 Prompt String, enter 17, and the desired system prompt value. There is no
default prompt string. The maximum length is 64 characters.
This example displays item 17
Prompt String
set to NewPrompt.
>17,NewPrompt
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.012
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF
08+SNMP System Parameters
12+Link Setup
14+IP Static Routes
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00023
16 FTP port number (1..65534)---------------------------------------------00021
17 Prompt String------------------------------------------------------NewPrompt
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the System Menu.
2. For System
Prompt,
enter the desired system prompt.
This example displays System
Prompt
set to NewPrompt.
System Menu
System Prompt
4-8
. . . ............................................. NewPrompt
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
TCP Settings
Description
The TCP settings are configured using two menu items. The configurable values are:
z
TCP default window size—Sets
the TCP default window size for AI232. The window
size specifies how many bytes AI232 will send to another device or how many
bytes another device may send to the AI232 before receiving an
acknowledgement.
Note: A small default window size way slow transfers to and from AI232.
z
TCP send ahead—Enables
or disables AI232’s ability to send a TCP window without
requiring an acknowledgment. When enabled, acknowledgment is not required.
When disabled, acknowledgment is required.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access System Menu 4.2.14.
2. For 06*TCP
is 200.
Default Window Size,
3. For 07*TCP
Send Ahead,
enter 6 to select 200, 512, 1024, or 2048. The default
enter 7 to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.
This example displays 06*TCP
to ON.
Default Window Size
set to 1024 and 07*TCP
Send Ahead
set
>7
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.012
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)--------------------------1024
07*TCP Send Ahead----------------------------------------------------------- ON
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the System Menu.
2. For TCP
Default Window Size,
3. For TCP
Send Ahead,
select 200, 512, 1024, or 2048. The default is 200.
select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.
4-9
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
This example displays TCP
Enabled.
Default Window Size
set to 1024 and TCP
Send Ahead
set to
System Menu
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . .................. <c>^[1,5]x
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .
200
512
[1024]
2048
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Telnet Port
Description
This item sets the Telnet port value for AI232.
Menu Item Type
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.
2. For 15 Telnet port number, enter 15, and the desired port number value. Valid
values are 1 to 65534. The default is 23.
This example displays 15
Telnet port number
set to 122.
>15,122
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.012
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)--------------------------1024
07*TCP Send Ahead----------------------------------------------------------- ON
08+SNMP System Parameters
12+Link Setup
14+IP Static Routes
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00122
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the System Menu.
2. For Telnet
4-10
Port,
enter the desired value. The default is 23.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration
This example displays Telnet
Port
set to 55.
System Menu
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . .................. <c>^[1,5]x
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .
200
512
[1024]
2048
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 55
4-11
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration
RADIUS Configuration
RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in
a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server. A primary and secondary
RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire AI232
network. AI232 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet, asynchronous, and
synchronous ports. The following menu items can be configured for RADIUS:
z
Server Settings
z
Shell/FTP Options
Server Settings
Description
The RADIUS server settings are configured using four menu items for the primary and
secondary server. The configurable values are:
z
Primary/secondary server status—Enables
or disables the primary or secondary
server.
z
Primary/secondary server IP address—Defines
an IP address for the primary or
secondary server.
z
Primary/secondary server port—Defines
the port number for the primary or
secondary server.
z
Primary/secondary server secret—Defines
a password for the primary or secondary
server.
Menu Item Types
Toggle for primary/secondary server status
Data for primary/secondary server IP address, server port, and server secret
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.
Attempting to do this generates an error.
To configure the RADIUS server settings:
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.2.
4-12
2. For 01*Primary
DISABLED.
Server Status,
enter 1 to select ENABLED or DISABLED. The default is
3. For 02 Primary
is 0.0.0.0.
Server IP Address,
enter 2, and the desired IP address. The default
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration
4. For 03
1812.
Primary Server Port,
enter 3, and the desired port number. The default is
5. For 04
Primary Server Secret,
enter 4, and the desired password. The default is
applied.
6. If desired, repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings.
This example displays:
z
01*Primary Server Status
z
02 Primary Server
z
03 Primary Server
z
04 Primary Server
set to ENABLED
IP Address set to 050.023.156.012
Port set to 122
Secret set to hilltop.
>4,hilltop
01*Primary
02 Primary
03 Primary
04 Primary
Server
Server
Server
Server
Menu 4.2.14-2.2
Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED
IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012
Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122
Secret------------------------------hilltop
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For RADIUS
3. For IP
Primary Server Status,
address,
4. For Port
select Enabled or Disabled.
enter an IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Number,
enter a port number. The default is 1812 for RADIUS servers.
5. For Secret, enter a password. The default is applied.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary RADIUS server.
This example displays:
z
RADIUS Primary Server Status
z
IP Address
z
z
set to Enabled
set to 12.33.57.2
Port Number set to 122
Secret set to newone.
RAS Configuration Menu
RADIUS Primary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
IP Address . . . . .... 12.33.57.2
Port Number . . . . . 122
Secret . . . .............. newone
4-13
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration
Shell/FTP Options
Description
This item sets the Shell/FTP option for RADIUS as one of the following:
z
Enabled—Enables
z
Disabled—Disables
z
Local fallback—Enables
RADIUS login.
RADIUS login.
RADIUS login, but resorts to local login if the RADIUS
login fails.
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.
Attempting to do this generates an error.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
To configure the shell/FTP RADIUS option:
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.2.
2. For 09*Shell/FTP Radius Option, enter 9 to select ENABLED, DISABLED, or LOCAL
FALLBACK. The default is DISABLED.
This example displays 09*Shell/FTP
Radius Option
set to LOCAL
FALLBACK.
>9
Menu 4.2.14-2.2
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122
04 Primary Server Secret------------------------------hilltop
05*Secondary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------DISABLED
06 Secondary Server IP Address----------------------------------000.000.000.000
07 Secondary Server Port (1..65535)---------------------------------------01812
08 Secondary Server Secret----------------------------applied
09*Shell/FTP Radius Option (Enabled, Disabled, Local Fallback)---LOCAL FALLBACK
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
To configure the shell/FTP RADIUS option:
1. Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For Shell
Disabled.
4-14
RAS Option,
select Disabled, RADIUS, RADIUS/Fallback. The default is
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration
This example displays the shell RAS option set to RADIUS/Fallback.
RAS Configuration Menu
RADIUS Primary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
IP Address . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0
Port Number . . . . 1812
Secret . . . .............. newone
RADIUS Secondary Server Status . . . . . . . . . .
Enabled
[Disabled]
IP Address . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0
Port Number . . . . 1812
Secret . . . ............. applied
Shell RAS Option:
Disabled
RADIUS
[RADIUS/Fallback]
4-15
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration
TACACS+ Configuration
TACACS+ authentication verifies user login information against the user’s permission
level on a TACACS+ server. Up to 9 TACACS+ servers are configurable to provide
secure access for an entire AI232 network. AI232 TACACS+ authentication is
available for Telnet, asynchronous, and FTP connections. The following menu items
can be configured for TACACS+ on the AI198 menu system:
z
Server Settings
z
Shell/FTP Options
Note: TACACS+ is not configurable from the AI232 local menu system.
Server Settings
Description
From the AI198 Menu System, the TACACS+ server settings are configured using
four menu items for the primary and secondary server. The configurable values are:
z
Primary/secondary server status—Enables
or disables the primary or secondary
server.
z
Primary/secondary server IP address—Defines
an IP address for the primary or
secondary server.
z
Primary/secondary server port—Defines
the port number for the primary or
secondary server.
z
Primary/secondary server secret—Defines
a password for the primary or secondary
server.
Menu Item Types
Toggle for primary/secondary server status
Data for primary/secondary server IP address, server port, and server secret
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
To configure the TACACS+ server settings:
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.4.
2. For 01*Primary
DISABLED.
3. For 02
Server Status,
enter 1 to select ENABLED or DISABLED. The default is
Primary Server IP Address,
enter 2, and the IP address. The default is
0.0.0.0.
4. For 03
4-16
Primary Server Port,
enter 3, and the port number. The default is 49.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration
5. For 04
Primary Server Secret,
enter 4, and the password. The default is applied.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings.
This example displays:
z
01*Primary Server Status
z
02 Primary Server IP Address
z
03 Primary Server
z
04 Primary Server
set to ENABLED
set to 050.023.156.011
Port set to 122
Secret set to hilltop.
>4,hilltop
01*Primary
02 Primary
03 Primary
04 Primary
Server
Server
Server
Server
Menu 4.2.14-2.4
Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED
IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012
Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122
Secret------------------------------hilltop
Shell/FTP Options
Description
This item sets the Shell/FTP option for TACACS+ as one of the following:
z
Enabled—Enables
z
Disabled—Disables
z
Local fallback—Enables
TACACS+ login.
TACACS+ login.
TACACS+ login, but resorts to local login if the
TACACS+ login fails.
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.
Attempting to do this generates an error.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
Important: Configuration of the shell/FTP TACACS+ option results in privilege level
authorization and supersedes any TACACS+ configuration on the AI232
card.
To configure the shell/FTP TACACS+ option:
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.4.
2. For 09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option, enter 9 to select ENABLED, DISABLED, or LOCAL
FALLBACK. The default is DISABLED.
4-17
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration
This example displays 09*Shell/FTP
TACACS Option
set to LOCAL
FALLBACK.
>9
Menu 4.2.14-2.4
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)---------------------------DISABLED
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------000.000.000.000
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00049
04 Primary Server Secret------------------------------applied
05*Secondary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------DISABLED
06 Secondary Server IP Address----------------------------------000.000.000.000
07 Secondary Server Port (1..65535)---------------------------------------00049
08 Secondary Server Secret----------------------------applied
09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option (Enabled, Disabled, Local Fallback)---LOCAL FALLBACK
4-18
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration
SNMP Configuration
This section discusses SNMP configuration options. The following configuration
components are available:
z
Authentication Traps
z
Community Names
z
Contact Persons
z
Node Information
z
SNMP Manager
Authentication Traps
Description
This item enables or disables the generation of authentication failure traps by AI232.
When a user enters faulty login information, authentication traps are sent from an
SNMP agent to inform the management station about the incorrect login attempt.
Menu Item Types
Toggle
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.
2. For 04*Send
authentication traps,
enter 4 to select ON or OFF. The default is ON.
The following example displays item 04*Send
authentication traps
set to ON.
>4
Menu 4.2.14.8
01 Contact person for this node-----------------------------------------------02 Node name------------------------------------------------------------------03 Node location--------------------------------------------------------------04*Send authentication traps------------------------------------------------ ON
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For Send
authentication traps,
select On or Off. The default is ON.
4-19
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration
The following example displays the selection of On for menu item Send
authentication
traps.
SNMP Menu
Contact person for this managed
Node name . . . . . . . . . . .
Node location . . . . . . . . .
Send authentication traps . . .
node . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
Community Names
Description
SNMP community names provide embedded password access to MIB contents.
There are 3 menu items available for configuring AI232 SNMP community name
information:
z
Read Community Name—Sets
the name that permits read only access to all objects in
the MIB.
z
MIB2 Read Community Name—Sets
the name that permits read only access to all
objects in MIB2.
z
Write Community Name—Sets
the name that permits read and write access to all
objects in the MIB.
Menu Item Types
Data for all menu items
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.
2. For 05 Read Community Name, enter 5, and the community name value. The
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is readonly.
3. For 06 MIB2 Read Community Name, enter 6, and the community name value. The
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is public.
4. For 07 Write Community Name, enter 7, and the community name value. The
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is administrator.
4-20
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration
The following example displays:
z
z
z
Item 05
Item 06
Item 07
set to ReadComm.
MIB2 Read Community Name set to MIB2.
Write Community Name set to WriteComm.
Read Community Name
>7,WriteComm
Menu 4.2.14.8
01 Contact person for this node-----------------------------------------------02 Node name------------------------------------------------------------------03 Node location--------------------------------------------------------------04*Send authentication traps------------------------------------------------ ON
05 Read Community Name-------------------------------------------------ReadComm
06 MIB2 Read Community Name------------------------------------------------MIB2
07 Write Community Name-----------------------------------------------WriteComm
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For menu item Read Community Name, enter the community name value. The
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is readonly.
3. For menu item MIB2 Read Community Name, enter the community name value. The
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is public.
4. For menu item Write Community Name, enter the community name value. The
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is administrator.
The following example displays:
z
z
z
Item Read Community Name set to ReadComm.
Item MIB2 Read Community Name set to MIB2.
Item Write Community Name set to WriteComm.
SNMP Menu
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
SNMP Manager #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.30
SNMP Manager #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.60
SNMP Manager #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.20
SNMP Manager #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 0.0.0.0
SNMP Manager #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 0.0.0.0
Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ReadComm
MIB2 Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... MIB2
Write Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... WriteComm
4-21
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration
Contact Persons
Description
This item defines the name of the person to contact regarding a specific node.
Menu Item Types
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.
2. For 01 Contact person for this node, enter 1, and the desired contact person. The
maximum length is 40 characters.
The following example displays John
for this node:
Doe
configured for menu item 01
Contact person
>1,John Doe
Menu 4.2.14.8
01 Contact person for this node----------------------------------------John Doe
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For Contact person for this
length is 40 characters.
managed node,
The following example displays John
Doe
enter the contact person. The maximum
configured for menu item Contact
person for
this managed node:
SNMP Menu
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... John Doe
Node Information
Description
There are two menu items available for configuring node information:
z
Node Name—Defines
z
Node Location—Defines
Menu Item Types
Data
4-22
the name of a location on a network.
a location on a network.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.
2. For 02 Node
characters.
name,
enter 2, and the node name. The maximum length is 40
3. For 03 Node location, enter 3, and a node location description. The maximum
length is 40 characters.
The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node
location Office B.
>3,Office B
Menu 4.2.14.8
01 Contact person for this node----------------------------------------John Doe
02 Node name------------------------------------------------------------newNode
03 Node location-------------------------------------------------------Office B
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For Node
name,
enter the node name. The maximum length is 40 characters.
3. For Node location, enter a node location description. The maximum length is 40
characters.
The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node
location Office B.
SNMP Menu
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... John Doe
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... newNode
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... Office B
SNMP Manager
Description
An SNMP manager is a combination of monitoring software running on a network
management station (NMS) and the actual device running the software. It collects and
acts on information from the various devices being monitored and/or controlled. The
SNMP manager also periodically polls the devices it is managing to get status
information. AI232 allows for the configuration of up to 5 SNMP managers.
Note: SNMP managers are only configurable when AI232 is in standalone mode.
They are not configurable through the AI198 menu system.
4-23
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration
Menu Item Types
Data
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For SNMP Manager
is 0.0.0.0.
#1,
enter the IP address of the first SNMP manager. The default
3. For SNMP Manager #2, enter the IP address of the second SNMP manager. The
default is 0.0.0.0.
4. For SNMP Manager
is 0.0.0.0.
#3,
enter the IP address of the third SNMP manager. The default
5. For SNMP Manager #4, enter the IP address of the fourth SNMP manager. The
default is 0.0.0.0.
6. For SNMP Manager
is 0.0.0.0.
#5,
enter the IP address of the fifth SNMP manager. The default
The following example displays:
z
SNMP Manager #1
z
SNMP Manager #2
z
SNMP Manager
z
SNMP Manager
z
SNMP Manager
set to 10.65.32.4
set to 10.65.32.5
#3 set to 10.65.32.6
#4 set to 10.65.32.7
#5 set to 10.65.32.8
SNMP Menu
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
SNMP Manager #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.4
SNMP Manager #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.5
SNMP Manager #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.6
SNMP Manager #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.7
SNMP Manager #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.8
4-24
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: Static Route Configuration
Static Route Configuration
AI232 allows for the configuration of static routes using both the AI198 and AI232
menu systems.
IP Address Settings
Description
Static routes are configured with a destination and next hop IP address. The
destination IP address defines the static IP route you want to configure. The next hop
IP address defines the IP address of the router you want the system to use when
trying to reach the destination IP address.
Menu Item Types
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.14.
2. From Menu 4.2.14.14, enter a value from 3 to 11. Menu 4.2.14.14.1 appears.
3. For 01
Destination IP,
4. For 02
Next Hop IP,
enter an IP address value.
enter an IP address value.
The following example displays the configuration of destination address 84.238.45.2
and next hop address 23.51.93.5.
>2,023.051.093.005
Menu 4.2.14.14.1
01 Destination IP-----------------------------------------------084.238.045.002
02 Next Hop IP--------------------------------------------------023.051.093.005
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the Static Route Menu.
2. Select [Add]. The IP Static Route Edit Menu appears.
3. For Destination
4. For Next
IP Address,
Hop IP Address,
enter an IP address value. The default is 1.1.1.1.
enter an IP address value. The default is 1.1.1.1.
The following example displays the configuration of destination IP address 12.240.54.3
and next hop IP address 12.240.54.4.
IP Static Route Edit Menu
Destination IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 12.240.54.3
Next Hop IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 12.240.54.4
4-25
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration
TID to Modem Mux Configuration
The following are available:
z
Inactivity Timeout
z
Initialization String
z
Port Bit Settings
z
TID to Route
Inactivity Timeout
Description
This menu item defines the amount of time (in seconds) the Modem Mux connection
must be inactive before it times out.
Menu Item Types
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2 to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.
3. For 06 Inactivity Timeout, enter 6, and a timeout value. Valid values are from 0 to
100000. The default is 300.
This example displays 06
Inactivity Timeout
set to 1500.
>6,1500
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1
01 TID to route-------------------------------------------02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------None
05 Init String----------------------------------06 Inactivity Timeout (0 - 100000)---------------------------------------001500
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.
TID].
The TID To
3. For Inactivity Timeout, enter a timeout value. Valid values are from 0 to 100000.
The default is 300.
4-26
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration
This example displays Inactivity
Timeout
set to 1500.
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu
TID to route . . .
Port Data Bits . .
Port Stop Bits . .
Port Parity . . .
Init String . . .
Inactivity Timeout
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . .....................
. . . . . .
Seven
[Eight]
. . . . . . . .
[One]
Two
. . . .
[None]
Even
Odd
...............................
. . . . . . . . . . . .... 1500
Initialization String
Description
This menu item defines the string that is sent upon indication that there is a device
connected to the port (DSR asserted).
Menu Item Types
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2 to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.
3. For 05 Init String, enter 5, and an initialization string value. Maximum length is
30 characters.
This example displays 05
Init String
set to conn23.
>5,conn23
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1
01 TID to route-------------------------------------------02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------None
05 Init String----------------------------------conn23
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.
3. For Init
String,
TID].
The TID To
enter a string value. Maximum length is 30 characters.
4-27
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration
This example displays Init
String
set to conn23.
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu
TID to route .
Port Data Bits
Port Stop Bits
Port Parity .
Init String .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . .....................
. . . . . .
Seven
[Eight]
. . . . . . . .
[One]
Two
. . . .
[None]
Even
Odd
........................ conn23
Port Bit Settings
Description
There are 3 menu items available for configuring TID to Modem Mux port bits:
z
Port Data Bits—Defines
z
Port Stop Bits—Defines
the number of stop bits for TID to Modem Mux. A stop bit
is an extra bit at the end of an asynchronous character that helps the receiver
recognize the end of the character.
z
Port Parity—Defines
the number of databits in a data byte.
parity, which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of
data have been altered during data transmission.
Menu Item Types
Toggle for all menu items
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2 to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.
3. For 02*Port
Data Bits,
enter 2, to select 7 or 8. The default is 8.
4. For 03*Port
Stop Bits,
enter 3, to select 1 or 2. The default is 1.
5. For 04*Port
Parity,
enter 4, to select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.
This example displays:
z
02*Port Data Bits
z
03*Port
z
04*Port
set to 7
Stop Bits set to 1
Parity set to Even.
>4,Even
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1
01 TID to route-------------------------------------------02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------7
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------Even
4-28
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.
2. From the System Menu, select TID
Summary Menu appears.
to Modem Mux.
The TID to Modem Mux
3. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.
4. For Port
Data Bits,
select 7 or 8. The default is 8.
5. For Port
Stop Bits,
select 1 or 2. The default is 1.
6. For Port
Parity,
TID].
The TID To
select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.
This example displays:
z
Port Data Bits
z
Port Stop Bits
z
Port
set to 7
set to 1
Parity set to Even.
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu
TID to route .
Port Data Bits
Port Stop Bits
Port Parity .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .....................
. . .
[Seven]
Eight
. . . . .
[One]
Two
.
None
[Even]
Odd
TID to Route
Description
This menu item defines the string that represents the TID to be routed to the Modem
Mux link.
Menu Item Type
Data
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2 to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.
3. For 01 TID to
characters.
route,
enter 1, and the desired TID. Maximum length is 20
This example displays the TID configured as COLUMBUS-OH.
>1 columbus-oh
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1
COLUMBUS-OH
4-29
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.
3. For TID
to route,
TID].
The TID To
enter the desired TID. Maximum length is 20 characters.
This example displays the TID configured as COLUMBUS-OH.
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... COLUMBUS-OH
4-30
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: Time Configuration
Time Configuration
AI232 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). SNTP is a time protocol
that maintains a common time among Internet hosts.
Note: Time configuration options are only available when AI232 is operating in
standalone mode.
The following configuration items are available:
z
Daylight Savings Time
z
SNTP Settings
z
Time Zone
Daylight Savings Time
Description
This menu item enables or disables daylight savings time, which is when clocks are
set ahead one hour the first Sunday in April and back one hour the last Sunday in
October to provide an extra hour of daylight during summer.
Menu Item Types
Toggle
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the System Menu.
Menu.
The Time Menu appears.
Saving Time on this host is,
select Enabled or Disabled.
2. From the System Menu, select Time
3. For Daylight
This example displays Daylight
Saving Time on this host is
set to Enabled.
Time Menu
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+00:00
Daylight Saving Time on this host is . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
4-31
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: Time Configuration
SNTP Settings
Description
SNTP is a time protocol that maintains a common time among Internet hosts. There
are 4 menu items available for configuring SNTP settings:
z
SNTP client on this host is—Enables or disables SNTP. If Enabled is selected, the
system attempts to contact the primary and secondary SNTP servers for the exact
time. If AI232 is unable to contact either the primary or secondary SNTP server, it
uses the local time maintained by AI232. If Disabled is selected, the system uses
the local time maintained by AI232.
z
Primary SNTP Server—Defines
the IP address of the first SNTP server from which
AI232 will attempt to retrieve the exact time.
z
Secondary SNTP Server—Defines the IP address of the second SNTP server from
which AI232 will attempt to retrieve the exact time.
Note: The SNTP client must be enabled before the primary or secondary SNTP
server can be defined.
z
SNTP Poll Interval (minutes)—Defines
the time interval (in minutes) for AI232 to
poll the SNTP servers.
Menu Item Types
Toggle for SNTP
client on this host is
Data for Primary
settings
SNTP Server, Secondary SNTP Server,
and SNTP
Poll Interval (minutes)
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For SNTP
client on this host is,
3. For Primary
0.0.0.0.
SNTP Server,
4. For Secondary
0.0.0.0.
select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Enabled.
enter the primary server IP address. The default is
SNTP Server,
enter the secondary server IP address. The default is
5. For SNTP Poll Interval (minutes), enter the time in minutes for the SNTP servers to
be polled. The default is 10.
4-32
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: Time Configuration
This following example displays:
z
SNTP client on this host is
z
Primary SNTP Server
z
Secondary
z
SNTP Poll
set to Enabled
set to 12.43.167.59
SNTP Server set to 12.43.167.60
Interval (minutes) set to 7.
Time Menu
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+00:00
Daylight Saving Time on this host is . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
SNTP client on this host is . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Primary SNTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 12.43.167.59
Secondary SNTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 12.43.167.60
SNTP Poll Interval (minutes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 7
Time Zone
Description
This menu item configures the time zone for AI232 to use. The configured value
represents the number of hours you are from UTC.
Menu Item Types
Data
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration
1. Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu.
2. For Current
Time Zone (+/-hh:mm),
enter the time zone you want AI232 to use:
z
For +/-, enter the direction (+ = east) (- = west) of Universal Coordinated Time
(UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time.
z
For
z
For mm, enter the number of minutes.
hh,
enter the number of hours.
Note: The time entered is the number of hours you are from UTC. For example,
if you are located in the Eastern Standard Time (EST) zone, you would
enter -05:00 in this field. This indicates that you are 5 hours behind UTC.
This example displays a time zone configuration of -05:00.
Time Menu
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-05:00
4-33
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
System Configuration: Time Configuration
4-34
5
Link Configuration
This chapter provides information on configuring AI232 links in the AI198 and AI232 local menu
systems.
Guide to this Chapter
AI232 Link Types
Connect Options Configuration
Disconnect Options Configuration
General Link Properties Configuration
General PPP Properties Configuration
Modem Option Configuration
PPP Authentication Configuration
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
5-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: AI232 Link Types
AI232 Link Types
AI232 has 3 configurable link types:
z
Asynchronous
z
Asynchronous PPP
z
Modem Multiplexer
Asynchronous
Asynchronous links use asynchronous transmission and support multiple baud rates,
parity types, stop bits, and software flow or hardware control.
See Also
z
Connect Options Configuration
z
Disconnect Options Configuration
z
General Link Properties Configuration
z
Modem Option Configuration
z
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
Asynchronous PPP
Asynchronous PPP links use PPP (point-to-point protocol) and asynchronous
transmission. They support PAP and CHAP for authentication and can be set as
bridged (BCP) or routed (IPCP) interfaces.
See Also
5-2
z
Connect Options Configuration
z
Disconnect Options Configuration
z
General Link Properties Configuration
z
General PPP Properties Configuration
z
Modem Option Configuration
z
PPP Authentication Configuration
z
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: AI232 Link Types
Modem Multiplexer
The modem multiplexer gives users access to a modem pool. The modem pool is the
list of ModMux links with attached modems. When a call comes in that requires a
modem, one is selected from the pool and dials out appropriately. The phone number
to dial is configurable for incoming calls that need to be attached to modems.
Note: Round-robin dialing has been incorporated for ModMux links to minimize the
demand placed on individual modems. Rather than always starting at the first
available modem, the ModMux driver rotates through all available modems so
that the first available one is not always the first to be dialed.
See Also
z
General Link Properties Configuration
z
General PPP Properties Configuration
z
PPP Authentication Configuration
5-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
Connect Options Configuration
Connect options configure the AI232 connection parameters. These options are
available for asynchronous links and asynchronous PPP links. The following
configuration items are available:
z
Alias
z
Call Retry Interval
z
Connect String
z
Connection Settings
z
Link Application
Alias
Description
This menu item specifies an alias name for the connection. When the link connection
options are satisfied, a call is placed based on information contained in the alias
name.
The specified name must correspond to an alias that has been created in the Alias
Menu. If no alias name is specified and Link Application is set to ALIAS in the AI198
menu system (AppAlias in the AI232 local menu system), then a default alias is used.
The default alias is the concatenation of the string asy. with the numeric link number,
such as asy.3, which indicates link number 3.
Note: The 02 Alias menu item is used only if 01*Link
(AppAlias in the AI232 local menu system).
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.
2. For 02
5-4
Alias,
enter 2, and the alias name.
Application
is set to ALIAS
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
This example displays 02
set to async.4.1.
Alias
>2,async.4.1
Menu 4.2.14.12.11
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Connect
3. For Link
Options Menu.
Application Alias,
This example displays Link
The Connect Options Menu appears.
enter the alias value.
Application Alias
set to async.4.1.
Connect Options Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login
Destination
[AppAlias]
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1
Call Retry Interval
Description
This menu item defines a value for the call retry interval. If a call fails to connect and
the retry interval is greater than 0, the link attempts to place the call again after the
specified number of seconds elapse. This setting has no effect on calls placed to the
link when the link is the destination and not the call originator. A value of 0 disables
call retry interval functionality.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.
2. For 03
Call retry interval,
enter 3, and the interval value. The default is 0.
5-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
This example displays 03
Call retry interval
set to 134.
>3,134
Menu 4.2.14.12.11
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00134
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Connect
3. For Call
Options Menu.
Retry Interval,
This example displays Call
The Connect Options Menu appears.
enter the desired interval value. The default is 0.
Retry Interval
set to 134.
Connect Options Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login
Destination
[AppAlias]
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134
Connect String
Description
This menu item configures the string that is sent after a connection is established. The
following character values apply:
z
<b> sends a break signal.
z
<n> represents the decimal value of an ASCII character. Valid values are 0 to 255.
z
text represents the text value in the string.
z
<p #> represents a pause control sequence. # is the number of tenths of seconds
to pause. Valid values are 1 to 20 (for 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds).
For example, string <b>login<13><p
z
z
z
z
z
5-6
A break signal
Text “login”
A carriage return
A 1 second pause
Another break signal.
10><b>
sends:
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.
2. For 08
Connect string,
This example displays 08
enter 8, and the connect string.
Connect string
set to <b>newstring<33><p
13><b>.
>8,<b>newstring<33><p 13><b>
Menu 4.2.14.12.11
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00134
04 Dial/Connect when DSR is on----------------------------------------------N/A
05*Connect when DCD is on---------------------------------------------------OFF
06*Connect when characters are received------------------------------------- ON
07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters--------------------------OFF
08 Connect string-------------------------------------<b>newstring<33><p 13><b>
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Connect
3. For Connect
Options Menu.
String,
The Connect Options Menu appears.
enter the connect string.
This example displays Connect
String
set to <b>newstring<33><p
13><b>.
Connect Options Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login
Destination
[AppAlias]
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134
Dial/Connect when DSR is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
Connect when DCD is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
Connect when characters are received. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
Connect String . . . . . . . . . . . ............... <b>newstring<33><p 13><b>
5-7
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
Connection Settings
Description
The connection settings are configured using three menu items:
z
or disables link connection when DCD is
asserted. If Connect when characters are received is also enabled and is satisfied
first, then Connect when DCD is on has no effect on the link connection.
z
Connect when characters are received—Enables or disables the link connection
when incoming characters are received. If Connect when DCD is on is also enabled
and is satisfied first, then Connect when characters are received has no effect on the
link connection.
z
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters—When
Connect when DCD is on—Enables
this menu item is enabled,
Connect when DCD is on and Connect when characters are received are forced off and
the retry interval is set to 30. If the link application type is set to LOGIN or ALIAS,
connection will occur as soon as the link is enabled (completely independent from
the DCD and incoming character status). If the link application type is set to
DESTINATION, the link will connect immediately when an outgoing call is placed to
the destination (also completely independent from DCD and incoming character
status).
Note:
Dial/Connect when DSR is on
has no effect on AI232 operation.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.
2. For 05*Connect
when DCD is on,
3. For 06*Connect
is ON.
when characters are received,
4. For 07*Connect without
The default is OFF.
5-8
enter 5 to select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.
enter 6 to select ON or OFF. The default
DSR, DCD or received characters,
enter 7 to select ON or OFF.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
This example displays:
z
05*Connect when DCD is on
z
06*Connect when characters are received
z
07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters
set to ON
set to OFF
set to OFF.
>5
Menu 4.2.14.12.11
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00030
04 Dial/Connect when DSR is on----------------------------------------------N/A
05*Connect when DCD is on--------------------------------------------------- ON
06*Connect when characters are received-------------------------------------OFF
07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters--------------------------OFF
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Connect
Options Menu.
The Connect Options Menu appears.
3. For Connect
when DCD is on,
select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.
4. For Connect
when characters are received,
5. For Connect
OFF.
without DSR, DCD or received characters,
select ON or OFF. The default is ON.
select ON or OFF. The default is
This example displays:
z
Connect when DCD is on
z
Connect when characters are received
z
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters
set to On
set to Off
set to Off.
Connect Options Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login
Destination
[AppAlias]
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134
Dial/Connect when DSR is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
Connect when DCD is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
Connect when characters are received. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
5-9
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
Link Application
Description
This menu item configures the link application type. The following options are
available:
z
Login—Specifies that the link will prompt for a user name and password when
connected. Upon successful login, a menu appears showing the available
destination alias names.
z
Destination—Specifies
z
(AppAlias)—Specifies that the link will attempt to place a call using direct
alias lookup without displaying a destination menu. If the link has a link application
alias name configured, then that name is used. Otherwise, a default alias name
(ASY.linkNum) is used.
that the link does not accept incoming calls. The link must
be accessed internally using alias lookup from another link or from a TCP/IP
connection.
Alias
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.
2. For 01*Link
LOGIN.
Application,
enter 1 to select LOGIN, DESTINATION, or ALIAS. The default is
This example displays 01*Link
Application
set to DESTINATION.
>1
Menu 4.2.14.12.11
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------DESTINATION
5-10
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Connect
3. For Link
Options Menu.
Application,
The Connect Options Menu appears.
select Login, Destination, or AppAlias. The default is Login.
This example displays Link
Application
set to Destination.
Connect Options Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login
[Destination]
1
AppAlias
5-11
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration
Disconnect Options Configuration
Disconnect options configure the parameters that are used when AI232 disconnects.
These options are available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links. The
following configuration items are available:
z
Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings
z
Disconnect Settings
z
Disconnect String
Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings
Description
The disconnect inactivity timer settings are configured using three menu items:
z
Disconnect inactivity timer—Defines an inactivity timer value. This value
establishes a timeout interval after which the link will automatically disconnect if
no data has been sent or received for the specified number of seconds. This value
only applies to incoming calls on links that have a retry interval timer setting of 0
and a link application setting of LOGIN or ALIAS (AppAlias).
Note: The Disconnect inactivity timer option must be set to a value greater than
0 for the inactivity timer to function.
z
Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call—Enables
or disables the
disconnect inactivity timer when the link receives a call.
z
Inactivity timer resets on incoming characters from destination—When
enabled,
incoming characters count as activity on a link (the inactivity timer resets). When
disabled, they do not count (the inactivity timer does not reset).
Menu Item Type
Data for disconnect inactivity timer
Toggle for Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call and Inactivity timer resets
on incoming characters from destination
Link Type Availability
Async
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.12.
2. For 04
5-12
Disconnect inactivity timer,
enter 4, and the timer value. The default is 0.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration
3. For 05*Inactivity Timer
The default is OFF.
enabled when link receives call,
4. For 06*Inactivity Timer resets on
select ON or OFF. The default is ON.
enter 5 to select ON or OFF.
incoming characters from destination,
enter 6 to
This example displays:
z
04 Disconnect inactivity timer
z
05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call
z
06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination
set to 236
set to ON
set to OFF.
>6
01 Disconnect
02*Disconnect
03*Disconnect
04 Disconnect
05*Inactivity
06*Inactivity
Menu 4.2.14.12.12
when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A
when DCD off--------------------------------------------------OFF
when a break character is received---------------------------- ON
inactivity timer (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)----------------00236
Timer enabled when link receives call------------------------- ON
Timer resets on incoming characters from destination----------OFF
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Disconnect
Options Menu.
The Disconnect Options Menu appears.
3. For Disconnect
inactivity timer,
4. For Inactivity
is Off.
Timer enabled when link receives call,
5. For Inactivity Timer resets
Off. The default is On.
enter the timer value. The default is 0.
select On or Off. The default
on incoming characters from destination,
select On or
This example displays:
z
Disconnect inactivity timer
z
Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call
z
Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination
set to 367.
set to On.
set to Off.
Disconnect Options Menu
Link being configured
Disconnect
Disconnect
Disconnect
Inactivity
Inactivity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
inactivity timer (0 - 32767s, 0 = disabled) . . . . . . . . . .. 367
Timer enabled when link receives call . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
Timer resets on incoming characters from destination
On
[Off]
5-13
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration
Disconnect Settings
Description
The disconnect settings are configured using two menu items:
z
Disconnect when a break character is received—Enables
or disables link
disconnection when a break character is received.
z
Disconnect when DCD off—Enables
or disables link disconnection when DCD is not
asserted.
Note: AI232 does not consider the DSR state when disconnecting calls.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Both menu items are available for async links
Menu item Disconnect when DCD off is available for asyncPPP links
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.12.
2. For 02*Disconnect
when DCD off,
enter 2 to select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.
3. For 03*Disconnect
The default is ON.
when a break character is received,
This example displays 02*Disconnect when
set to OFF.
DCD off
enter 3 to select ON or OFF.
set to ON and 03*Disconnect
when a
break character is received
>3
Menu 4.2.14.12.12
01 Disconnect when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A
02*Disconnect when DCD off-------------------------------------------------- ON
03*Disconnect when a break character is received----------------------------OFF
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Disconnect
5-14
Options Menu.
The Disconnect Options Menu appears.
3. For Disconnect
when DCD is off,
select On or Off. The default is Off.
4. For Disconnect
On.
when a Break character is received,
select On or Off. The default is
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration
This example displays Disconnect when DCD is off set to On and Disconnect
character is received set to Off for an async link.
when a Break
Disconnect Options Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnect when DSR is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnect when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnect when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .
On
[On]
On
3
[Off]
Off
[Off]
Disconnect String
Description
This menu item configures the string the link sends before the link disconnects. The
following character values apply:
z
<b> sends a break signal.
z
<n> represents the decimal value of an ASCII character. Valid values are 0 to 255.
z
text represents the text value in the string.
z
<p #> represents a pause control sequence. # is the number of tenths of seconds
to pause. Valid values are 1 to 20 (for 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds).
For example, string <b>login<13><p
z
z
z
z
z
10><b>
sends:
A break signal
The text “login”
A carriage return
A one second pause
Another break signal.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.12.
2. For 07 Disconnect
80 characters.
string,
enter 7, and the disconnect string. Maximum length is
5-15
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration
This example displays 07
Disconnect string
set to <b>newString<33><p
15><b>.
>7,<b>newString<33><p 15><b>
01 Disconnect
02*Disconnect
03*Disconnect
04 Disconnect
05*Inactivity
06*Inactivity
07 Disconnect
Menu 4.2.14.12.12
when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A
when DCD off-------------------------------------------------- ON
when a break character is received----------------------------OFF
inactivity timer (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)----------------00000
Timer enabled when link receives call-------------------------OFF
Timer resets on incoming characters from destination---------- ON
string----------------------------------<b>newString<33><p 15><b>
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu.
2. Select Disconnect
3. For Disconnect
Options Menu.
String,
The Disconnect Options Menu appears.
enter the disconnect string.
This example displays Disconnect
String
set to <b>newString<33><p
15><b>.
Disconnect Options Menu
Link being configured
Disconnect
Disconnect
Disconnect
Inactivity
Inactivity
Disconnect
5-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .
On
[Off]
inactivity timer (0 - 32767s, 0 = disabled) . . . . . . . . . .. 367
Timer enabled when link receives call . . . . . . . .
[On]
Off
Timer resets on incoming characters from destination
On
[Off]
String . . . . . . . . . . .............. <b>newString<33><p 15><b>
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
General Link Properties Configuration
General link properties are configurable using menus accessed directly from the link
configuration menu. The following configuration items are available:
z
Auto Disable Error Limit
z
Port Data Bits
z
Flow Control
z
Port Parity
z
Link Description
z
Port Speed
z
Link Number
z
Port Stop Bits
z
Link State
z
Xon Repeat Interval
z
Link Type
Auto Disable Error Limit
Description
This menu item disables a link when the rate of errors received on that link exceeds a
user-specified threshold. This prevents a bad link or cable from streaming enough
errors to lock up or crash AI232.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For Auto Disable Error Limit, enter the associated item number, a comma, and the
error limit value. (For example, 9,25000.) The default is 0.
5-17
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
This ModMux link example displays 08
Auto Disable Error Limit
set to 25000.
>8,25000
Menu 4.2.14.12
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- ModMux
03 Link Description-----------------------------Async link 1
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600
06*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)----------------------------------------None
07 Xon Repeat interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat)------------------------000
08 Auto Disable Error Limit (0-1000000)---------------------------------0025000
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Link Menu.
2. Select Auto
Disable Menu.
3. For Errors/second
is 0.
The Link Auto Disable Menu appears.
limit for auto disable,
This example displays Errors/second
enter the error limit value. The default
limit for auto-disable
set to 25000.
Link Auto Disable Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Errors/second limit for auto-disable
03
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25000
Flow Control
Description
This menu item enables a receiving device to tell a sending device to stop sending
data when data is coming too fast and to start sending data when the receiver is
ready.
There are two available flow control options for AI232:
z
None—Specifies
z
XonXoff—Specifies
no flow control.
the flow control option that uses standard ASCII control
characters to tell a sending device to stop or resume data transmission.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
5-18
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 09*Flow
Control,
enter 9 to select None or XonXoff. The default is None.
This async link example displays 09*Flow
Control
set to XonXoff.
>9
01 Link
02*Link
03 Link
04*Link
05+Port
06*Port
07*Port
08*Port
09*Flow
Menu 4.2.14.12
Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01
Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
Description-----------------------------Async link 1
state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled
speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600
Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8
Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1
Parity (None, Odd, Even)-------------------------------------------None
Control (None, XonXoff)-----------------------------------------XonXoff
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Link Menu.
2. For SW
Flow Control,
select None or XonXoff.
This example displays SW
Flow Control
set to XonXoff.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 1
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Async]
AsyncPPP
ModMux
Port speed (in bits per second):
300
1200
2400
4800
[9600]
19.2K
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Autobaud
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seven
[Eight]
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[One]
Two
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[None]
Even
Odd
SW Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
None
[XonXoff]
Link Description
Description
This menu item defines a description for a link.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
5-19
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 03 Link Description, enter 3, and a description associated with the link.
Maximum length is 30 characters.
This example displays 03
Link Description
set to New
Async Link.
>3,New Async Link
Menu 4.2.14.12
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
03 Link Description-----------------------------New Async Link
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Link Menu.
2. For Link Description, enter a description associated with the link. Maximum length
is 30 characters.
This example displays Link
Description
set to New
Async Link.
Async Link Menu
Link
Link
Link
Link
to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Async]
AsyncPPP
ModMux
Link Number
Description
This menu item defines the number of the link being configured.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 01
5-20
Link number,
enter 1, and the link number. The default is 1.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
This example displays 01
Link number
set to 3.
>1,3
Menu 4.2.14.12
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Link Menu.
2. For Link
to configure,
enter the link number. The default is 1.
This example displays Link
to configure
set to 3.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Link State
Description
This menu item enables or disables a link.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 04*Link
state,
enter 4 to select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Enabled.
This example displays 04*Link
state
set to Disabled.
>4
01 Link
02*Link
03 Link
04*Link
Menu 4.2.14.12
Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03
Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
Description-----------------------------Async link 3
state (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------------------Disabled
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Link Menu.
2. For Link
state,
select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.
5-21
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
This example displays Link
state
set to Disabled.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 3
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabled
[Disabled]
Link Type
Description
This menu item defines the type of link as asynchronous, asynchronous PPP, or
ModMux. Refer to section AI232 Link Types on page 5-2 for more information about
link types.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 02*Link
Type,
enter 2 to select Async, AsyncPPP, or ModMux. The default is Async.
This example displays 02*Link
Type
set to ModMux.
>2
Menu 4.2.14.12
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- ModMux
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Link Menu.
2. For Link
Type,
select Async, AsyncPPP, or ModMux. The default is Async.
This example displays Link
Type
set to ModMux.
Modem Mux Link Menu
Link
Link
Link
Link
5-22
to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 3
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabled
[Disabled]
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Async
AsyncPPP
[ModMux]
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
Port Data Bits
Description
This menu item defines the number of databits in a data byte.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 06*Port
Data Bits,
enter 6 to select 7 or 8. The default is 8.
This example displays 06*Port
Data Bits
set to 7.
>6
01 Link
02*Link
03 Link
04*Link
05+Port
06*Port
Menu 4.2.14.12
Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01
Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
Description-----------------------------Async link 1
state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled
speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600
Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------7
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. For Port
data bits,
select Seven or Eight. The default is Eight.
5-23
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
This example displays Port
data bits
set to Seven.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Async]
AsyncPPP
ModMux
Port speed (in bits per second):
300
1200
2400
4800
[9600]
19.2K
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Autobaud
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seven
[Eight]
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[One]
Two
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
None
Even
[Odd]
Port Parity
Description
This menu item defines parity, which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of
data have been altered during data transmission.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 08*Port
Parity,
enter 8 to select None, Odd, or Even. The default is None.
This example displays 08*Port
Parity
set to Odd.
>8
01 Link
02*Link
03 Link
04*Link
05+Port
06*Port
07*Port
08*Port
Menu 4.2.14.12
Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01
Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
Description-----------------------------Async link 1
state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled
speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600
Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8
Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1
Parity (None, Odd, Even)------------------------------------------- Odd
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. For Port
5-24
parity,
select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
This example displays Port
parity
set to Odd.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 3
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabled
[Disabled]
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Async]
AsyncPPP
ModMux
Port speed (in bits per second):
300
1200
2400
4800
[9600]
19.2K
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Autobaud
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seven
[Eight]
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[One]
Two
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
None
Even
[Odd]
Port Speed
Description
This menu item defines the baud rate for a port.
Menu Item Type
Data in the AI232 local menu system
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For Port
speed,
enter the associated item number.
5-25
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
Menu 4.2.14.12.5 appears.
>5
Menu 4.2.14.12.5
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
300
Baud
1200 Baud
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
57600 Baud
115200 Baud
Auto Baud
Note:
10 Auto Baud
is not available for AsyncPPP or ModMux.
3. Enter a value from 1 to 10 to select the port speed. Menu 4.2.14.12 reappears
with the new port speed selection.
This example displays 05+Port
speed
set to 4800.
>4
01 Link
02*Link
03 Link
04*Link
05+Port
5-26
Menu 4.2.14.12
Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01
Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
Description-----------------------------Async link 1
state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled
speed------------------------------------------------------------- 4800
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Link Menu.
2. For Port speed, select 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, 115.2K, or
Autobaud. The default is 9600.
This example displays Port
speed
set to 4800.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Async]
AsyncPPP
ModMux
Port speed (in bits per second):
300
1200
2400
[4800]
9600
19.2K
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Autobaud
Port Stop Bits
Description
This menu item defines the number of stop bits. A stop bit is an extra bit at the end of
an asynchronous character that helps the receiver recognize the end of the character.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 07*Port
Stop Bits,
enter 7 to select 1 or 2. The default is 1.
This example displays 07*Port
Stop Bits
set to 2.
>7
01 Link
02*Link
03 Link
04*Link
05+Port
06*Port
07*Port
Menu 4.2.14.12
Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01
Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
Description-----------------------------Async link 1
state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled
speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600
Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8
Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------2
5-27
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. For Port
stop bits,
select One or Two. The default is One.
This example displays Port
stop bits
set to Two.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Async]
AsyncPPP
ModMux
Port speed (in bits per second):
300
1200
2400
[4800]
9600
19.2K
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Autobaud
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seven
[Eight]
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One
[Two]
Xon Repeat Interval
Description
This menu item enables or disables the XON repeat interval. When enabled, AI232
sends multiple XON characters at the specified interval. Some equipment requires the
receipt of multiple XONs before sending data after it has received an XOFF.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.
2. For 10
5-28
Xon Repeat interval,
enter 10, and a interval value. The default is 0.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration
This example displays 10
Xon Repeat interval
set to 30.
>10,30
Menu 4.2.14.12
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------Async
03 Link Description-----------------------------New Async Link
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 4800
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------2
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)------------------------------------------- Odd
09*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)----------------------------------------None
10 Xon Repeat interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat)------------------------030
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. For XON
Repeat Interval,
This example displays XON
enter a interval value. The default is 0.
Repeat Interval
set to 30.
Async Link Menu
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Enabled]
Disabled
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Async]
AsyncPPP
ModMux
Port speed (in bits per second):
300
1200
2400
4800
[9600]
19.2K
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Autobaud
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seven
[Eight]
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[One]
Two
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[None]
Even
Odd
SW Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[None]
XonXoff
XON Repeat Interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5-29
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration
General PPP Properties Configuration
The following menu items are available for PPP configuration:
z
IPCP Address Settings
z
Maximum Unit Settings
z
Network Control Protocol
IPCP Address Settings
Description
The IPCP address settings are configured using three menu items:
z
Local IP address—Defines
z
Remote IP address—Defines
z
Subnet mask—Defines
a valid local IP address for AI232.
an IP address for the remote device.
a subnet mask for the link.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
AsyncPPP and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Do one of the following:
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2.
z
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.10.
2. For 01*Network
Control Protocol,
enter 1 to select IPCP. The default is IPCP.
3. For 02 Local IP Address, enter 2, and the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies
that the remote device will assign the IP address for AI232. The default is 0.0.0.0.
4. For 03 Remote IP Address, enter 3, and the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies
that the remote device will assign its own IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
5. For 04
5-30
Subnet Mask,
enter 4, and the subnet mask. The default is 255.255.255.240.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration
This example displays:
z
01*Network Control Protocol
z
02 Local IP Address
z
03 Remote
z
04 Subnet
set to IPCP
set to 099.045.006.033
IP Address set to 106.046.092.004
Mask set to 255.255.255.000.
>4,255.255.255.000
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------IPCP
02 Local IP Address---------------------------------------------099.045.006.033
03 Remote IP Address--------------------------------------------106.046.092.004
04 Subnet Mask--------------------------------------------------255.255.255.000
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the AsyncPPP or ModMux Link Menu.
2. Select PPP
Configuration Menu.
The PPP Configuration Menu appears.
3. For Local IP address, enter the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies that the
remote device will assign the IP address for AI232. The default is 0.0.0.0.
4. For Remote IP address, enter the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies that the
remote device will assign its own IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
5. For Subnet
Mask,
enter the subnet mask. The default is 255.255.255.240.
This example displays:
z
Local IP address
z
Remote
z
Subnet
set to 23.230.34.5
IP address set to 23.230.34.6
Mask set to 255.255.255.000.
PPP Configuration Menu
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Control Protocol
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPCP Address Parameters
Local IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[IPCP]
3
BCP
... 23.230.34.5
... 23.230.34.6
255.255.255.000
5-31
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration
Maximum Unit Settings
Description
The maximum unit settings are configured using two menu items:
z
Maximum receive unit
z
(MTU)—Defines the maximum number of bytes that can be
transmitted in a single packet.
(MRU)—Defines the maximum number of bytes that can be
received in a single packet.
Maximum transmit unit
Note: During LCP negotiations on a PPP link, AI232 will advertise the MRU
configured by the user. If the peer negotiates its MRU with AI232, then the
MTU on the AI232 side will be set to the peer’s MRU. If the peer does not
negotiate its MRU, then the MTU on the AI232 side will be set to the value
configured by the user.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
AsyncPPP and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Do one of the following:
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2.
z
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.10.
2. For 05 Maximum Receive Unit, enter 5, and the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for
network control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.
3. For 06 Maximum Transmit Unit, enter 6, and the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for
network control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.
This example displays 05
set to 900.
Maximum Receive Unit
set to 1000 and 06
Maximum Transmit Unit
>6,900
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------ BCP
02 Local IP Address---------------------------------------------000.000.000.000
03 Remote IP Address--------------------------------------------000.000.000.000
04 Subnet Mask--------------------------------------------------255.255.255.240
05 Maximum Receive Unit (128-1568)-----------------------------------------1000
06 Maximum Transmit Unit (64-1600)-----------------------------------------0900
5-32
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the AsyncPPP or ModMux Link Menu.
2. Select PPP
Configuration Menu.
The PPP Configuration Menu appears.
3. For Maximum Receive Unit, enter the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for network
control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.
4. For Maximum Transmit Unit, enter the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for network
control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.
This example displays Maximum Receive Unit set to 1000 and Maximum
for an IPCP network control protocol.
Transmit Unit
set to
900
PPP Configuration Menu
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Control Protocol
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPCP Address Parameters
Local IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[IPCP]
3
BCP
....... 0.0.0.0
....... 0.0.0.0
255.255.255.240
Maximum Receive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Maximum Transmit Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Network Control Protocol
Description
This menu item defines the network control protocol as BCP or IPCP. BCP configures,
enables, and disables bridge protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link. IPCP
configures, enables, and disables IP protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
AsyncPPP and ModMux
5-33
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Do one of the following:
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2.
z
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.10.
2. For 01*Network
Control Protocol,
This example displays 01*Network
to BCP.
enter 1 to select IPCP or BCP. The default is IPCP.
Control Protocol
for an asynchronous PPP link set
>1
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------ BCP
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or ModMux Link Menu.
2. Select PPP
Configuration Menu.
3. For Network
Control Protocol,
This example displays Network
The PPP Configuration Menu appears.
select IPCP or BCP. The default is IPCP.
Control Protocol
set to IPCP.
PPP Configuration Menu
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Control Protocol
5-34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[IPCP]
3
BCP
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration
Modem Option Configuration
The following menu items are used for modem option configuration. They are
available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links:
z
Modem String
z
Dialing Time-out Interval
z
Number of Dial Attempts
Modem String
Description
This menu item configures the modem string, which can be any of the following:
z
The text sent to a port when an associated link starts or restarts following the
termination of a call
z
The dial string the link to uses to dial the modem automatically once it is
enabled
z
A command that places the modem in auto answer mode so that it is set to
receive calls
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.14.
2. For 01 Modem
characters.
string,
enter 1, and the modem string. Maximum length is 80
This example displays 01
Modem string
set to 6145553003.
>1,6145553003
Menu 4.2.14.12.14
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003
5-35
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. Select Modem
3. For Modem
Setup Menu.
string,
The Modem Setup Menu appears.
enter the modem string.
This example displays Modem
string
set to 6145552002.
Modem Setup Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002
Dialing Time-out Interval
Description
This menu item configures the amount of time in seconds that the modem waits
before redialing a call when connection is not initially established.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.14.
2. For 02
Dialing time-out,
This example displays 02
enter 2, and the timeout value. The default is 30.
Dialing time-out
set to 10.
>2,10
Menu 4.2.14.12.14
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003
02 Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s)---------------------------------------------010
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. Select Modem
3. For Dialing
5-36
Setup Menu.
time-out,
The Modem Setup Menu appears.
enter the time out value. The default is 30.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration
This example displays Dialing
time-out
set to 10.
Modem Setup Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002
Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Number of Dial Attempts
Description
This menu item configures the number of times the modem redials before terminating
a call.
Menu Item Type
Data
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.14.
2. For 03 Number
default is 3.
of dial attempts,
This example displays 03
enter 3, and the number of redial attempts. The
Number of dial attempts
set to 15.
>3,15
Menu 4.2.14.12.14
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003
02 Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s)---------------------------------------------010
03 Number of dial attempts (0 - 100, 0 = continuous retry)------------------015
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. Select Modem
3. For Number
Setup Menu.
The Modem Setup Menu appears.
of dial attempts,
enter the number of redial attempts. The default is 3.
5-37
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration
This example displays Number
of dial attempts
set to 15.
Modem Setup Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002
Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Number of dial attempts (0 - 100, 0 = continuous retry) . . . . . . . . . . 15
5-38
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration
PPP Authentication Configuration
The following menu items are available for PPP authentication configuration:
z
Local Authentication Settings
z
RAS Option
z
Remote Authentication Settings
Local Authentication Settings
Description
The local authentication settings are configured using three menu items:
z
Local authentication method—Defines
the local authentication method as one of
the following options:
z
z
PAP—Specifies
z
CHAP—Specifies
the method that verifies the identity of the peer using a threeway handshake that is done upon initial link establishment. Verification may
be repeated any time after the link has been established. CHAP also encrypts
the user’s password over the PPP link to provide added security.
z
None—Specifies
the method that uses a two-way handshake that is done only
upon initial link establishment.
no authentication will be used.
Local PAP/CHAP identity—Defines
the user name for local PAP/CHAP
authentication.
z
Local PAP password/CHAP secret—Defines
the password for local PAP/CHAP
authentication.
Menu Item Type
Toggle for local authentication method
Data for local PAP/CHAP identity and local PAP password/CHAP secret
Link Type Availability
AsyncPPP and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Do one of the following:
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1.
z
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.9.
5-39
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration
2. For 02*Local
None.
Authentication Method,
enter 2 to select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is
3. For 03 Local PAP/CHAP identity, enter 3, and the user name. Maximum length is 24
characters. The default is applied.
4. For 04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter 4, and the password. Maximum
length is 24 characters. The default is applied.
This example displays:
z
02*Local Authentication Method
z
03 Local
z
04 Local
set to PAP
PAP/CHAP identity set to bri24
PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.
>4,documentation
Menu 4.2.14.12.9
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------ DISABLED
02*Local Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------- PAP
03 Local PAP/CHAP identity----------------------------bri24
04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret---------------------documentation
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or ModMux Link Menu.
2. Select PPP
Authentication Menu.
The PPP Authentication Menu appears.
3. For Local
Authentication Method,
4. For Local
PAP/CHAP Identity,
5. For Local
PAP Password/CHAP Secret,
select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is None.
enter the user name. The default is applied.
enter the password. The default is applied.
This example displays:
z
Local Authentication Method
z
Local PAP/CHAP Identity
z
Local PAP
set to CHAP
set to bri24
Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.
PPP Authentication Menu
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Authentication Options
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .
None
PAP
[CHAP]
RAS Option:
Disabled
RADIUS
[RADIUS/Fallback]
Local PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24
Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret
. . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation
5-40
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration
RAS Option
Description
This menu item configures the method AI232 uses to obtain ID and password
information for a link. The following options are available:
z
Disabling RAS causes AI232 to use local ID and password information to validate
the ID and password sent from a remote device.
z
Enabling RADIUS causes AI232 to use the ID and password information
configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and password sent from the
remote device.
z
Enabling RADIUS with fallback causes AI232 to attempt to use the ID and
password information configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and
password sent from the remote device. If neither of the RADIUS servers respond,
AI232 uses the local ID and password (configured in the PPP Authentication
Menu) for validation.
z
Enabling TACACS+ causes AI232 to use the ID and password information
configured in the TACACS+ server to validate the ID and password sent from the
remote device.
z
Enabling TACACS+ with fallback causes AI232 to attempt to use the ID and
password information configured in the TACACS+ server to validate the ID and
password sent from the remote device. If neither of the TACACS+ servers
respond, AI232 uses the local ID and password (entered in the PPP
Authentication Menu) for validation.
Notes: When connecting to a remote PPP device, ensure that the PPP
authentication timeout on that device is set to a minimum of 30 seconds. If
the network latency is high, set that value to a higher number of seconds.
The TACACS+ server used must support version 1.78 or later of the
TACACS+ protocol.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
AsyncPPP and ModMux
5-41
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Do one of the following:
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1.
z
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.9.
2. For 01*RAS Option, enter 1 to select DISABLED, RADIUS, RADIUS_FB, TACACS, or TACACS_FB.
The default is DISABLED.
This example displays 01*RAS
Option
set to TACACS for an asynchronous PPP link.
>1
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)-----------TACACS
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
To configure RADIUS PPP authentication:
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or ModMux Link Menu.
2. Select PPP
3. For RAS
Authentication Menu.
Option,
The PPP Authentication Menu appears.
select Disabled, RADIUS, or RADIUS/Fallback. The default is Disabled.
This example displays RAS
Option
set to RADIUS/Fallback.
PPP Authentication Menu
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Authentication Options
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAS Option:
Disabled
RADIUS
[RADIUS/Fallback]
None
PAP
[CHAP]
Tip: To configure TACACS+ PPP authentication on AI232, use shell command aaa
authen on page 8-7.
5-42
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration
Remote Authentication Settings
Description
The remote authentication settings are configured using three menu items:
z
Remote authentication method—Defines
the remote authentication method as one
of the following options:
z
z
PAP
z
CHAP specifies the method that verifies the identity of the peer by using a
three-way handshake that is done upon initial link establishment. Verification
may be repeated any time after the link has been established. CHAP also
encrypts the user’s password over the PPP link to provide added security.
z
None
specifies the method that uses a two-way handshake that is done only
upon initial link establishment.
specifies no authentication will be used.
Remote PAP/CHAP identity—Defines
the user name for remote PAP/CHAP
authentication.
z
Remote PAP password/CHAP secret—Defines
the password for remote PAP/CHAP
authentication.
Menu Item Type
Toggle for remote authentication method
Data for remote PAP/CHAP identity and remote PAP password/CHAP secret
Link Type Availability
AsyncPPP and ModMux
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Do one of the following:
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1.
z
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.9.
2. For 05*Remote
is None.
3. For 06
Authentication Method,
Remote PAP/CHAP identity,
enter 5 to select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default
enter 6, and the user name. The default is
applied.
4. For 07
Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret,
enter 7, and the password. The default is
applied.
5-43
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration
This example displays:
z
05*Remote Authentication Method
z
06 Remote
z
07 Remote
set to CHAP
PAP/CHAP identity set to bri24
PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.
>7,documentation
Menu 4.2.14.12.9
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------ DISABLED
02*Local Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------- PAP
03 Local PAP/CHAP identity----------------------------bri24
04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret---------------------documentation
05*Remote Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------CHAP
06 Remote PAP/CHAP identity---------------------------bri24
07 Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret--------------------documentation
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the AsyncPPP or ModMux Link Menu.
2. Select PPP
Authentication Menu.
The PPP Authentication Menu appears.
3. For Remote
Authentication Method,
4. For Remote
PAP/CHAP Identity,
5. For Remote
PAP Password/CHAP Secret,
select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is None.
enter the user name. The default is applied.
enter the password. The default is applied.
This example displays:
z
Remote Authentication Method
z
Remote
z
Remote
set to CHAP
PAP/CHAP Identity set to bri24
PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.
PPP Authentication Menu
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Authentication Options
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .
None
PAP
[CHAP]
RAS Option:
Disabled
RADIUS
[RADIUS/Fallback]
Local PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24
Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret
. . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation
Remote Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .
None
PAP
[CHAP]
Remote PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24
Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation
5-44
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
The following configuration items are available for RTS and DTR lead control
configuration:
z
DTR State Configuration
z
RTS State Configuration
DTR State Configuration
Description
DTR is an RS-232 signal sent from a computer or terminal to a modem that indicates
that it (the computer or terminal) is able to accept data. DTR lead control is configured
using two menu items:
z
the DTR connect state to ON or OFF. ON sets DTR to on
while the link is connecting and while it is connected. OFF turns this functionality
off.
z
DTR disconnect state—Sets
DTR connect state—Sets
the DTR disconnect state to one of the following
options:
z
ON—Sets
z
OFF—Sets
z
TOGGLE—Makes
DTR to on when the link disconnects.
DTR to off when the link disconnects.
DTR pulse when the link disconnects. The pulse polarity is
opposite to the sense specified for the connected state.
Note: The RTS/DTR lead control options only take effect when the link is configured
as a destination link.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. For an asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.13.
2. For 01*DTR
connect state,
enter 1 to select ON or OFF. The default is ON.
3. For 02*DTR
disconnect state,
enter 2 to select ON, OFF, or TOGGLE. The default is OFF.
5-45
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
This example displays 01*DTR
to TOGGLE.
connect state
set to OFF and 02*DTR
disconnect state
set
>2
Menu 4.2.14.12.13
01*DTR connect state---------------------------------------------------------ON
02*DTR disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)--------------------------------TOGGLE
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. Select RTS/DTR Lead
Menu appears.
Control Options Menu.
3. For DTR
connect state,
4. For DTR
disconnect state,
The RTS/DTR Lead Control Options
select On or Off. The default is On.
This example displays DTR
select On, Off, or Toggle. The default is Off.
connect state
set to Off and DTR
disconnect state
set to
Toggle.
RTS/DTR Control Options Menu
Link being configured
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTR connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTR disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
Off
3
On
[Off]
[Toggle]
RTS State Configuration
Description
RTS is an RS-232 signal that is sent from a transmitting terminal to a receiving
terminal to request permission to transmit. It is configured using the following menu
items:
RTS connect state—Sets
5-46
the RTS connect state to one of the following options:
z
On—Sets
z
Off—Sets
z
FlowControl—Enables
RTS to on when the link is connecting or connected.
RTS to off when the link is connecting or connected.
RTS to follow the hardware flow control convention.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
RTS disconnect state—Sets
the RTS disconnect state to one of the following options:
z
On—Sets
z
Off—Sets
z
Toggle—Makes RTS pulse when the link disconnects. The pulse polarity is
opposite to the sense specified for the connected state.
RTS to on when the link disconnects.
RTS to off when the link disconnects.
Menu Item Type
Toggle
Link Type Availability
Async and AsyncPPP
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. For an asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link, access menu 4.2.14.12.13.
2. For 03*RTS
connect state,
3. For 04*RTS
disconnect state,
This example displays 03*RTS
state set to TOGGLE.
enter 3 to select ON, OFF, or FLOW
CONTROL.
The default is ON.
enter 4 to select ON, OFF, or TOGGLE. The default is OFF.
connect state
set to FLOW
CONTROL
and 04*RTS
disconnect
>4
01*DTR
02*DTR
03*RTS
04*RTS
Menu 4.2.14.12.13
connect state---------------------------------------------------------ON
disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)-----------------------------------OFF
connect state (On, Off, Flow Control)-----------------------FLOW CONTROL
disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)--------------------------------TOGGLE
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.
2. Select RTS/DTR Lead
Menu appears.
Control Options Menu.
3. For RTS
connect state,
4. For RTS
disconnect state,
The RTS/DTR Lead Control Options
select On, Off, or FlowControl. The default is On.
select On, Off, or Toggle. The default is Off.
5-47
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration
This example displays RTS
to Toggle.
connect state
set to FlowControl and RTS
disconnect state
set
RTS/DTR Control Options Menu
Link being configured
DTR
DTR
RTS
RTS
5-48
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
Off
disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On
3
On
[Off]
Off
[Toggle]
[FlowControl]
Off
[Toggle]
6
TID Multiplexing
This chapter provides information on configuring TID multiplexing.
Guide to this Chapter
Overview
TID Multiplexing Configuration
TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting
6-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: Overview
Overview
AI232 supports TID multiplexing, which enables a single call from an OSS to fan out
into multiple calls to various NEs. The initiating call may be asynchronous or TCP, but
cannot originate from a destination menu. Refer to Figure 6-1 for an illustration of TID
multiplexing.
TID1
TID2
NEs
TID1
TID2
TID3
Network
TID1
TID2
TID3
TID4
TID5
TID6
TID3
AI232
OSS
TID4
TID5
TID6
TID4
NEs
TID6
TID5
Figure 6-1 TID Multiplexing Overview
In Figure 6-1, AI232 takes a single call from an OSS and routes TL1 commands to
various NEs by means of the TID in the TL1 command. Similarly, AI232 receives TL1
responses and NE reporting messages from several NEs and routes these messages
to the appropriate OSS. The call to AI232 from the OSS is a parent call. The calls
from AI232 to the various NEs are children calls.
After receiving a TL1 command from the OSS, AI232 checks to see if there is an
existing connection for each TID. If a connection to the appropriate NE is already
established, then AI232 forwards the TL1 command to the NE as specified by the TID.
The following characteristics apply to AI232 when it attempts to connect to an NE:
6-2
z
If AI232 is unable to establish a connection to an NE, it will buffer the TL1
command and try to reconnect within 2 seconds.
z
AI232 tries to connect up to three times if it cannot immediately establish a
connection.
z
AI232 buffers only one TL1 command for each NE. If a connection is made, AI232
forwards the buffered command to the NE.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: Overview
z
If a connection is not established after four tries or if AI232 receives a TL1
command with an unknown TID, the TL1 command gets discarded and a
message gets logged.
z
If the OSS is disconnected from AI232, all associated children calls to the NEs are
disconnected.
6-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
TID Multiplexing Configuration
Establish TID multiplexing by configuring aliases for calls that will go through AI232.
Configure a parent alias to accept the incoming call from the OSS. After doing this,
configure children aliases to route calls to the various network elements. For more
information about aliases, refer to Chapter 7: Alias and Call Routing Configuration.
Configuring the Parent Alias
Note: AI recommends that you do not use connect-on-activity PVCs to establish a
parent connection.
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
1. Log in to AI198.
2. At the prompt, enter menu to access the Main Menu.
3. For 08+Configure
menu appears.
the alias translation table,
enter 8. The alias configuration
>8
Menu 8
01 Alias name -****************************************************************
02+Simple alias translation
03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO
06 Link number is (1..16) 07 Caller's address 08 Call data 09 App. string 10 Called protocol 11 Caller's protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14+Test macros
15 Show entire alias
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table
19+Delete the above alias translation entry
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
4. For 01
6-4
Alias name,
enter the alias name for the call coming from the OSS.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
5. For 02+Simple alias
translation options.
translation,
enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears with the available
>2
Menu 8.2
01
02
03
04
Simple alias translation
Multiplexed connection
Multiplexed only translation
SLC routing translation
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
enter 4. Menu 8 reappears with SLC
translation selected for menu item 2.
6. For 04
SLC routing translation,
7. If you are using single alias translation, for 03
address of AI232.
8. For 08
Call data,
Destination,
routing
enter 3, and the IP
enter 8, and the parent name.
Note: When creating the parent name, note that you use the parent name to
make the children alias names. For example, if a parent is named
PARENT1, valid child names would be PARENT1.1 and PARENT1.2.
9. For 09
App. string,
enter:
TMUXn [ TID:tid_for_AI232 ]
n
Defines the maximum number of children connections. Valid
values are 1 to 128.
tid_for_AI232
Defines the terminal identifier for AI232.
10. For 10
Called protocol,
11. (optional) For 11
enter 10,=""
Caller's protocol,
enter 11, and the caller's protocol.
12. Save your changes.
6-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in
standalone mode.
1. Log in to the AI232 Main Menu.
2. From the AI232 Main Menu, select Alias
Menu.
3. From the Alias Summary Menu, select Add
The Alias Summary Menu appears.
Alias.
The Alias Edit Menu appears.
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . .
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................
Called Protocol . . .......................................................
Application String . .......................................................
Alternate Route . . .......................................................
Description . . . . .......................................................
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Yes]
No
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beginning
[End]
+ Alias Test Menu
<F1> Help
4. For Alias
<F2> Send
Name,
<F4> Close
Range: {255 characters}
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu
enter the alias name for the call coming from the OSS.
5. If you are using single alias translation, for Destination, enter the IP address of
AI232. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of single alias
translation.
6. For Call
data,
enter the parent name.
Note: When creating the parent name, note that you use the parent name to
make the children alias names. For example, if a parent is named
PARENT1, valid child names would be PARENT1.1 and PARENT1.2.
6-6
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
7. For Application
string,
enter:
TMUXn [ TID:tid_for_AI232 ]
n
Defines the maximum number of children connections. Valid
values are 1 to 128.
tid_for_AI232
Defines the terminal identifier for AI232.
8. For Called
protocol,
enter ="".
9. (optional) For Caller's
protocol,
enter the caller's protocol.
10. Save your changes.
Configuring the Children Aliases
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System
AI232 supports a maximum of 512 child connections. These connections can be
asynchronous or TCP/IP.
To configure the child aliases:
1. Log into AI198.
2. At the prompt, enter menu to access the Main Menu.
3. For 08+Configure
menu appears.
the alias translation table,
enter 8. The alias configuration
>8
Menu 8
01 Alias name -****************************************************************
02+Simple alias translation
03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO
06 Link number is (1..16) 07 Caller's address 08 Call data 09 App. string 10 Called protocol 11 Caller's protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14+Test macros
15 Show entire alias
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table
19+Delete the above alias translation entry
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
6-7
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
4. For 01
Alias name,
enter:
parent_name.m
parent_name
Defines the name you entered for 08
alias configuration.
m
Defines the child number. Valid values are 1 to n (specified
during the parent alias configuration).
5. For 02+Simple alias
translation options.
translation,
Call data
during the parent
enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears with the available
>2
Menu 8.2
01
02
03
04
Simple alias translation
Multiplexed connection
Multiplexed only translation
SLC routing translation
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
6. For 04
SLC routing translation,
enter 4. Menu 8 re-appears with SLC
translation selected for menu item 2.
routing
7. If you are using single alias translation, for 03 Destination, enter 3, and the IP
address of AI232. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of
single alias translation.
6-8
8. For 04
Called address,
9. For 07
Caller's address,
10. For 08
Call data,
enter 4, and the called address.
enter 7, and the caller's address.
enter 8, and the call data information.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
11. For 09
App. string,
enter:
TID:tid
tid
Defines the TID of the destination NE. Maximum length is 20 characters.
12. (optional) For 10
13. For 11
Called protocol,
Caller's protocol,
enter 10, and the called protocol.
enter 11,="".
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in
standalone mode.
1. Log in to the AI232 Main Menu.
2. From the AI232 Main Menu, select Alias
Menu.
3. From the Alias Summary Menu, select Add
The Alias Summary Menu appears.
Alias.
The Alias Edit Menu appears.
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . .
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................
Called Protocol . . .......................................................
Application String . .......................................................
Alternate Route . . .......................................................
Description . . . . .......................................................
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Yes]
No
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beginning
[End]
+ Alias Test Menu
<F1> Help
<F2> Send
<F4> Close
Range: {255 characters}
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu
6-9
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
4. For Alias
name,
enter:
parent_name.m
parent_name
Defines the name you entered for 08
alias configuration.
m
Defines the child number. Valid values are 1 to n (specified
during the parent alias configuration).
Call data
during the parent
5. If you are using single alias translation, for Destination, enter the IP address of
AI232. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of single alias
translation.
6. For Called
address,
7. For Caller's
8. For Call
enter the called address.
address,
Data,
enter the caller's address.
enter the call data information.
9. For Application
String,
enter:
TID:tid
tid
Defines the TID of the destination NE. Maximum length is 20 characters.
10. (optional) For Called
11. For Caller's
protocol,
protocol,
enter the called protocol.
enter ="".
12. Save your changes.
Example Configurations
The following screens display parent and child alias configurations that do the
following:
1. A call comes in on alias 172.16.30.61 at port 6001 (172.16.30.61#6001).
2. The call fans out into two children calls. 09 App. string in the parent alias
configuration determines the number of children; in this case, it is noted by TMUX2.
The children have the following names: PARENT1.1 and PARENT1.2. These names are
established through 08 Call data in the parent alias configuration. The calls to the
first and second child are PVCs.
3. AI232 forwards all TL1 commands with TIDs NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1, NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2,
and NE-OH-COLUMBUS-3 through the first child connection. It forwards all TL1
commands with TIDs NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 and NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2 through the
second child connection.
6-10
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
This example displays the parent alias configuration in the AI198 menu system.
>11 =""
Menu 8
01 Alias name ------------------------------------------------172.16.30.61#6001
02+Simple alias translation
03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES
06 Link number is (1..16) 07 Caller's address 08 Call data -----------------------------------------------------------PARENT1
09 App. string -----------------------------------------------------------TMUX2
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------=""
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""
12 Alternate routing alias 14+Test macros
15 Show entire alias
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table
19+Delete the above alias translation entry
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
6-11
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
This example displays the parent alias configuration in the AI232 menu system.
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in
standalone mode.
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . . ..................................... 172.16.30.61#6001
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
............................................... PARENT1
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""
Called Protocol . . ................................................... =""
Application String . ................................................. TMUX2
Alternate Route . . .......................................................
Description . . . . .......................................................
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Yes]
No
+ Alias Test Menu
<F1> Help
6-12
<F2> Send
<F4> Close
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the AI198 menu
system.
>11 =""
Menu 8
01 Alias name --------------------------------------------------------PARENT1.1
02+Simple alias translation
03 Destination ----------------------------------------------------172.16.30.61
04 Called address ----------------------------------------------------------PVC
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES
06 Link number is (1..16) 07 Caller's address 08 Call data ----------------------------------------------------------ASY.29.1
09 App. string --TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-3
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------=""
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""
12 Alternate routing alias 14+Test macros
15 Show entire alias
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table
19+Delete the above alias translation entry
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
>11 =""
Menu 8
01 Alias name --------------------------------------------------------PARENT1.2
02+Simple alias translation
03 Destination ----------------------------------------------------172.16.30.61
04 Called address ----------------------------------------------------------PVC
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES
06 Link number is (1..16) 07 Caller's address 08 Call data ----------------------------------------------------------ASY.30.1
09 App. string -----------------TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------=""
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""
12 Alternate routing alias 14+Test macros
15 Show entire alias
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table
19+Delete the above alias translation entry
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
6-13
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration
These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the AI232 menu
system.
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in
standalone mode.
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................. PARENT1.1
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................... 172.16.30.61
.......................................................
................................................... PVC
.............................................. ASY.29.1
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""
Called Protocol . . ................................................... =""
Application String . TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2 TID:NE-OH-COL
Alternate Route . . .......................................................
Description . . . . .......................................................
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Yes]
No
+ Alias Test Menu
<F1> Help
<F2> Send
<F4> Close
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................. PARENT1.2
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................... 172.16.30.61
.......................................................
................................................... PVC
.............................................. ASY.30.1
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""
Called Protocol . . ................................................... =""
Application String . ....... TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2
Alternate Route . . .......................................................
Description . . . . .......................................................
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Yes]
No
+ Alias Test Menu
<F1> Help
6-14
<F2> Send
<F4> Close
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting
TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting
If an OSS is not getting a response from an NE, it can send a TL1 retrieve header
command (RTRV-HDR) to determine if the problem is with the NE or with AI232. The
parent connection on AI232 responds to RTRV-HDR commands that have the same TID
as the one configured for the card.
Tip: For more information regarding TL1 commands, responses, and formats, refer
to the Belcore document GR-833-CORE.
RTRV-HDR
This command is used primarily as an aliveness check.
Format
RTRV-HDR:[ tid ]::ctag;
Parameters
tid
Defines the TID for AI232. Note that the TID and SID are the same.
ctag
Defines the correlation tag used to correlate responses to input commands.
Each input command has a unique ctag . Maximum length is 6 characters.
Responses include the identical ctag.
Normal Response Format
This example displays the format of the response that appears when RTRV-HDR is
successfully executed:
<cr><lf><lf>
<sp><sp><sp><SID><sp><YY-MM-DD><sp><HH:MM:SS><cr><lf>
M<sp><sp><ctag><sp>COMPLD<cr><lf>;
Table 6-1 describes each of the items in the above response format.
Table 6-1 RTRV-HDR Response Format Description
Response Item
Description
cr
Specifies a carriage return.
lf
Specifies a line feed.
sp
Specifies a space.
SID
Specifies a system identifier (system ID).
6-15
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting
Table 6-1 RTRV-HDR Response Format Description (Continued)
Response Item
Description
YY-MM-DD
Specifies the date.
HH:MM:SS
Specifies the time of day.
ctag
Specifies the correlation tag.
COMPLD
Specifies completion. The Input requirement is satisfied.
Normal Response Example
This example displays the response that appears when RTRV-HDR:AI232:12345; is
executed.
AI232 00-04-14 05:06:39
M 12345 COMPLD;
Error Response Format
If AI232 receives TL1 commands other than RTRV-HDR with the same card TID, it
responds with a deny message. This example displays the deny message format.
<cr><lf><lf>
<sp><sp><sp><SID><sp><YY-MM-DD><sp><HH:MM:SS><cr><lf>
M<sp><sp><ctag><sp>DENY<cr><lf>
<sp><sp><sp><errcde><cr><lf>;
Table 6-2 describes each of the items in the above response format.
Table 6-2 Error Response Format Description
6-16
Response Item
Description
cr
Specifies a carriage return.
lf
Specifies a line feed.
sp
Specifies a space.
SID
Specifies a system identifier (system ID).
YY-MM-DD
Specifies the date.
HH:MM:SS
Specifies the time of day.
ctag
Specifies the correlation tag.
DENY
Specifies that the input requirement is not satisfied.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting
Table 6-2 Error Response Format Description (Continued)
Response Item
Description
errcde
Specifies the error code.
Error Response Example
This example displays the response that appears if RTRV-HDR fails.
AI232 00-04-14 05:06:39
M 12345 DENY
IIAC;
Diagnostics for TID Multiplexing
To view information on TID multiplexed calls and the associated TIDs, use
diag-tconn. This command displays a list of all connections on the card in the same
format as diag-conn. However, diag-tconn is not interactive.
Use this command either from the AI232 shell or through AI198 as a winslc
command. Refer to diag-tconn on page 8-55 for more information.
6-17
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting
6-18
7
Alias and Call Routing
Configuration
This chapter provides information on configuring aliases and routing calls on AI232.
Guide to this Chapter
Overview
Call Routing
Protocol Processing Modules
Alias Macros
7-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Overview
Overview
AI232 uses aliases to route calls across the backplane of AIswitch. Each incoming
call’s routing information must match an entry in the alias table, or else the call is
rejected. When AI232 is in switch mode, the alias table is stored on AI198. When
AI232 is in standalone mode, the alias table is stored in AI232’s local memory. For
more information about alias translation and macros, see sections Call Routing on
page 7-4 and Alias Macros on page 7-19.
Figure 7-1 displays a typical call processing data flow scenario where AI232 is used.
Data flow can be upstream or downstream, depending on the direction from which the
data originates.
AI232 Card A
IP address
172.16.30.100
TCP
Incoming
TCP/IP
Call
upstream
downstream
ASY
downstream
Outgoing
TCP/IP
Call
IRB
upstream
TCP
AI232 Card B
IP address
172.16.30.200
upstream
Incoming
Asynchronous
Call
downstream
Async
downstream
upstream
ASY
Async
Outgoing
Asynchronous
call to asy.4.2
Figure 7-1 Call Data Flow
In Figure 7-1, an asynchronous protocol call is coming into AI232 card A and needs to
pass over the IRB and be sent out AI232 card B. Refer to the figure to follow the flow
of the call.
The following events occur if the data flow is from left to right:
1. The data comes into AI232 card A as an asynchronous packet.
2. The data travels upstream and is converted into a TCP call.
3. The data starts downstream through the ASY protocol option to preserve the
packetization. Refer to ASY on page 7-18 for information about the ASY protocol.
4. The data is sent out AI232 card A over TCP on the IRB.
7-2
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Overview
5. The TCP packet is received by AI232 card B.
6. The data travels upstream through the ASY protocol option to preserve
packetization.
7. The data packet is converted, travels downstream, and is transmitted out AI232
using an asynchronous protocol with the original packetizing characteristics
preserved.
7-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
Call Routing
To route calls within AI232, an alias must be configured according to the source
protocol and the destination protocol.
Note: Aliases created in AI198 are not visible to AI232 when it is running in
standalone mode. However, you can configure aliases in the AI232 local menu
system when it is in standalone mode.
Configuring an Alias
To route calls with AI232, you must configure an alias for a source and destination
protocol. The following procedure takes you through the configuration of an alias
name on a single AI232 card and between two AI232 cards.
Note: Specific configuration information about menu items in the following
procedures is located in sections Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the
AI198 Menu System on page 7-10 and Source/Destination Protocol Tables for
the AI232 Menu System on page 7-12.
Configuring an Alias in the AI198 Menu System
To configure an alias in the AI198 Menu System:
1. Log in to AI198.
2. At the prompt, type menu. The main menu appears.
7-4
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
3. To access menu 08+Configure
the alias translation table,
enter 8. Menu
8
appears:
>8
Menu 8
01 Alias name -****************************************************************
02+Simple alias translation
03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO
06 Link number is (1..16) 07 Caller's address 08 Call data 09 App. string 10 Called protocol 11 Caller's protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14+Test macros
15 Show entire alias
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table
19+Delete the above alias translation entry
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
4. For 01
call.
Alias name -,
enter 1, followed by the alias name for the incoming (source)
AI198 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining
alias menu items.
Note: The alias name may include leading, trailing, or embedded wildcard
matching characters. You may enter an asterisk (*) which replaces zero or
more characters, a question mark (?) which replaces one character, or an
alias macro that starts with an equal sign (=).
For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions, refer to:
z
Table 7-1 on page 7-10
z
Table 7-2 on page 7-10
z
Table 7-3 on page 7-11
z
Table 7-4 on page 7-11.
7-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
5. To access menu 02+Simple
alias translation,
enter 2. Menu
8.2
appears:
>2
Menu 8.2
01
02
03
04
Simple alias translation
Multiplexed connection
Multiplexed only translation
SLC routing translation
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
6. To select 04 SLC routing translation, enter 4. Menu
routing translation configuration items.
8
reappears with the SLC
Important: Menu item 04 SLC routing translation is the only valid menu item for
AI232. Use SLC routing translations to route calls through cards that
support non-time division subchannel (TDS) connections.
7. (optional) If you are routing calls between two AI232 cards, enter 3, and the IP
address of the remote AI232.
8. For 04
Called address -,
enter 4, and the the called (destination) address.
The called (destination) address defines the IP address to contact. Maximum
length is 14 characters. The actual IP address or an alias macro can be entered
here.
9. For 05 This
and No.
alias is visible in the destination menu,
enter 5 to toggle between Yes
This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen.
10. (optional) For 08
Call data -,
enter 8, and the call user data.
Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used. It may be directly entered
as an alias macro.
7-6
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
11. (optional) For 10
Called protocol -,
enter 10, and the called protocol type.
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules
on page 7-14.
12. (optional) For 11
Caller's protocol -,
enter 11, and the caller’s protocol type.
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules
on page 7-14.
13. For 20
Save the changes made,
enter 20 to save the alias configuration.
14. Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations.
Configuring an Alias in the AI232 Menu System
To configure an alias in the AI232 Menu System:
1. Log in to AI232.
2. At the prompt, type menu. The AI232 Main Menu appears.
3. Access the Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu appears.
4. From the the Alias Summary Menu, select [Add
appears:
Alias].
The Alias Edit Menu
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . .
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................
Called Protocol . . .......................................................
Application String . .......................................................
Alternate Route . . .......................................................
Description . . . . .......................................................
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Yes]
No
+ Alias Test Menu
<F1> Help
<F2> Send
<F4> Close
Range: {255 characters}
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu
7-7
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
5. For Alias
Name,
enter the alias name for the incoming (source) call.
AI232 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining
alias menu items.
Note: The alias name may include leading, trailing, or embedded wildcard
matching characters. You may enter an asterisk (*) which replaces zero or
more characters, a question mark (?) which replaces one character, or an
alias macro that starts with an equal sign (=).
For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions, refer to:
z
Table 7-5 on page 7-12
z
Table 7-6 on page 7-12
z
Table 7-7 on page 7-12
z
Table 7-8 on page 7-13.
6. (optional) If you are routing calls between two AI232 cards, enter the IP address
of the remote AI232 in the destination field.
7. (optional) For Called
Address,
enter the called (destination) address.
The called (destination) address defines the IP address to contact. Maximum
length is 14 characters. The actual IP address or an alias macro can be entered
here.
8. (optional) For Call
Data,
enter the call user data.
Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used. It may be directly entered
as an alias macro.
9. (optional) For Caller's
Protocol,
enter the caller’s protocol type.
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules
on page 7-14.
10. (optional) For Called
Protocol,
enter the called protocol type.
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules
on page 7-14.
11. For Display
Alias in Destination Menu,
select Yes or No.
This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen.
12. Select <F2>
Send
to save the changes.
13. Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations.
7-8
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
Source/Destination Protocol Tables
The following tables are organized according to source protocols. Match the
destination protocol with the source protocol to find the appropriate menu item
entries:
z
Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI198) on page 7-10
z
Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI198) on page 7-10
z
TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI198) on page 7-11
z
TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI198) on page 7-11
z
Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI232) on page 7-12
z
Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI232) on page 7-12
z
TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI232) on page 7-12
z
TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI232) on page 7-13.
The following parameters are referenced in Table 7-1 on page 7-10 through Table 7-8
on page 7-13:
call_data
Defines the call data. Maximum length is 16 characters.
called_address
Defines the address being called. Maximum length is 14
characters.
caller_address
Defines the address of the caller. Maximum length is 14
characters.
ip_address
Defines the IP address in dotted decimal format. The # symbol
must be entered as a field separator between the ip_address
field and the tcp_port_number field.
link_number
Defines the number of the serial link.
tcp_port_number
Defines the TCP port number. Valid values are from 1 to
65535.
7-9
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the AI198 Menu System
Table 7-1 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI198)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
Async
Async
01
baseport.asy.link_number
Example: 16.asy.3
02
SLC Routing Translation
04
PVC
08
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Async
TCP
01
baseport.asy.link_number
Example: 16.asy.3
02
SLC Routing Translation
04
Destination IP Address:
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
Table 7-2 Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI198)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
Async
TCP with
telnet break
01
baseport.asy.link_number
Example: 16.asy.3
02
SLC Routing Translation
04
Destination IP Address:
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
7-10
10
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)
11
=””
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
Table 7-3 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI198)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
TCP
TCP
01
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
02
SLC Routing Translation
04
Destination IP Address:
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
TCP
Async
01
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
02
SLC Routing Translation
04
PVC
08
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Table 7-4 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI198)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
TCP
Async with
async break
01
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
02
SLC Routing Translation
04
PVC
08
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
11
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)
7-11
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the AI232 Menu System
Table 7-5 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI232)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
Async
Async
Alias Name
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Called Address
PVC
Call Data
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Async
TCP
Alias Name
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Called Address
Destination IP Address:
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
Table 7-6 Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI232)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
Async
TCP with
telnet break
Alias Name
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Called Address
Destination IP Address:
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
Called Protocol
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)
Caller’s Protocol
=””
Table 7-7 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI232)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
TCP
TCP
Alias Name
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
Called Address
Destination IP Address:
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
7-12
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing
Table 7-7 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI232) (Continued)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
TCP
Async
Alias Name
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
Called Address
PVC
Call Data
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Table 7-8 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI232)
Source
Destination
Menu Item
Information
TCP
Async with
async break
Alias Name
ip_address#tcp_port_number
Example: 198.29.5.6#389
Called Address
PVC
Call Data
asy.link_number
Example: asy.3
Caller’s Protocol
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)
7-13
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules
Protocol Processing Modules
Protocol processing modules are used to process data as it passes through AI232.
Module Types
The following module types are available:
z
Packetizing module (PKT)
z
Translation language one (TL1)
z
Telnet module (TN)
z
Asynchronous protocol processing module (ASY)
z
Line discipline module (STT)
PKT
The packetizing module holds data as it arrives until AI232 receives specified
characters (such as new lines). Once the packetizing character is received, all of the
data that has been held is passed on as a single packet. This module also allows data
to be packetized on a timer, which you can set. It also allows you to specify which
characters, if any, to be filtered out of the data stream. PKT works on all protocols.
Defaults
Sets no packetizing timer
Sets no idle packetizing timer
Sets the packetizing timer to .06 seconds
Sets no filter characters
Passes the break upstream
Passes the break downstream
Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream
Optional Parameters
7-14
-Td
Sets the packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second. It packetizes d
hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized. By setting d
to zero, the option is turned off.
-Id
Sets the idle packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second. It packetizes
after d hundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters.
-Pd,d,d
Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each d option.
Specify up to 16 characters.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules
-Fd,d,d
Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each d option.
Specify up to 16 characters. It is possible to packetize on a filtered
character.
-U
Prevents the passing of breaks upstream.
-D
Prevents the passing of breaks downstream.
-S
Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters. Enter up to 16
characters. The packet module accepts only one -S parameter.
-E
Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session.
Examples
PKT -T6
Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to .06
seconds.
PKT -P0xD,0x3B
Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing characters to
carriage return and semi-colon.
PKT -F10,127
Provides packetizing and filters out the characters for line
feed and delete.
PKT -U
Provides packetizing but prevents breaks from being
propagated upstream.
PKT -I10 -P0x0D -D
Provides packetizing on carriage returns for .10 seconds of
idle time and prevents breaks from being propagated
downstream.
PKT -S13,10
Provides packetizing and sets the sequence to carriage
return followed by a line feed.
7-15
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules
TL1
The Translation Language One module typically works with messages traveling
between asynchronous protocols. However, it also works with all other protocols.
Some OSSs require that each TL1 command/response be fully contained in one
packet. By packetizing on the TL1 termination characters (“;<>”), the TL1 module
ensures that each TL1 command/response is transmitted in one packet.
Defaults
Sets no packetizing timer
Sets no idle packetizing timer
Sets the packetizing timer to .06 seconds
Sets no filter characters
Passes the break upstream
Passes the break downstream
Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream
Optional Parameters
7-16
-Td
Sets the packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second. It packetizes d
hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized. By setting d
to zero, this option is turned off.
-Id
Sets the idle packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second. It packetizes
after d hundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters.
-Pd,d,d
Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each d option.
Specify up to 16 characters.
-Fd,d,d
Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each d option.
Specify up to 16 characters. It is possible to packetize on a filtered
character.
-U
Prevents the passing of breaks upstream.
-D
Prevents the passing of breaks downstream.
-S
Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters. Enter up to 16
characters. The packet module accepts only one -S parameter.
-E
Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules
Examples
TL1 -T6
Provides TL1 packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to .06
seconds.
TL1 -F10,127
Provides TL1 packetizing and filters out the characters for line
feed and delete.
TL1 -U
Provides TL1 packetizing and prevents breaks from passing
upstream.
TL1 -120 -D
Provides TL1 packetizing on TL1 delimiters for 20 seconds of idle
time. Prevents breaks from passing downstream.
TN
The Telnet module filters Telnet commands out of the data stream and processes
them appropriately. It also adds commands, as necessary, to data as it travels
downstream. When a Telnet break is received, it is converted to an asynchronous
break as required. When an asynchronous break is received from upstream, it is
converted to a Telnet break and passed downstream.
Defaults
Passes breaks upstream
Passes breaks downstream
Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL SGA
Optional Parameters
-U
Prevents passing break upstream.
-D
Prevents passing break downstream.
-Ed,d
Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL Suppress Go Ahead
(SGA). This is useful when a Telnet connection is made to a remote device
that provides an echo. If d,d is specified, then the Telnet negotiation string
is modified. The Telnet negotiation string can be up to 32 characters.
7-17
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules
Examples
TN -U
Provides Telnet handling, but prevents breaks from being
propagated upstream.
TN -E
Provides Telnet handling and initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL
Echo and WILL SGA.
TN -E255,1
Provides Telnet handling and causes the Telnet session to send IAC
(255) ECHO (1) when the connection is initiated. Initiates WILL SGA.
ASY
The ASY module takes a single argument that specifies the string to be transmitted on
the outgoing connection when a call is placed. The string typically contains a modem
dial sequence.
Optional Parameters
Echo
Causes local echo from an ASY port.
Edit
Buffers calls for line editing and sends lines as a whole when ENTER is
pressed. Lines can be edited by using BACKSPACE.
STT
The STT module provides support for local echo and line edit capabilities.
Optional Parameters
7-18
Echo
Echoes received characters back to the sender.
Edit
Echoes characters and provides buffering and line editing capabilities. With
this option, received characters are forwarded one line at a time after
receiving a terminating carriage return. Characters entered before the
carriage return arrives can be deleted with the <Backspace> key.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
Alias Macros
An alias macro is a program within an alias that translates incoming call requests into
outgoing call requests. It is a shortcut that allows a programmer to write many aliases
by only writing one macro.
Macros allow for call routing with fewer aliases. Using them with alternate routing
provides multiple routes for a single alias.
A macro may be entered for combinations of any or all of the following items:
z
Alias names
z
Called addresses
z
Caller’s addresses
z
Call data
z
Application-specific strings
z
Alternate routing aliases.
Each macro acts as a command line with instructions for matching patterns in alias
fields and for manipulating them for redirection.
The following topics are covered in this section:
z
Alias Macro Components
z
Alias Macro Configuration
Alias Macro Components
This section discusses the components in an alias macro, including:
z
Start Symbols
z
Comments
z
Constants
z
Variables
z
Wildcard Symbols
z
Operators
z
Functions
Start Symbols
The start symbol for an alias macro is an equal (=) sign. It is followed by one or more
alias macro components.
7-19
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
Comments
Comments are added at the programmer’s discretion to explain macro functionality.
Comments can be entered either on a blank line or at the end of a line containing a
macro. To enter a comment on a blank line, it must begin with two forward slashes (//).
To enter a comment in a field with a macro, it must begin with a pound sign (#) at the
end of a macro.
This example displays a comment on its own line in the Application
comment after a macro in the Alternate Route field.
String
field and a
Application String . ........................................... //links 1-4
Alternate Route . . ................................. ="6145550384"#from OH
Note: The pound sign (#) can be entered as part of the macro string if it is enclosed
in either single or double quotes. The pound sign may be either directly
enclosed (=A+’#’+D(C)), or the string that the pound sign resides in may be
enclosed (=‘198.127.1.4#23’).
Constants
Macro constants are either fixed alphanumeric characters enclosed in single or
double quotes or integers between positive and negative 2,147,483,647. All constant
strings equal zero. Constant strings cannot be used in mathematical functions.
Variables
Several variables are recognized by macros. Refer to Table 7-9 for more information.
Note: Variables are not case-sensitive.
Table 7-9 Macro Variables
Variable
7-20
Value
C
(CUD)
Specifies a “call user data” variable.
A
(CALLED)
Specifies a “called address” variable.
B
(CALLER)
Specifies a “caller’s address” variable.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
Wildcard Symbols
Macros have two available wildcard symbols:
z
?
matches any single character.
z
*
matches zero or more characters.
Note: Alias names that use wildcards are not really macros. Wildcards are not
processed in alias names that start with ‘=’.
Operators
Operators are used for calculation of mathematical expressions in alias macros.
AI232 evaluates expressions from left to right in order of precedence as shown in
Table 7-10. To change the order of precedence, a programmer may enclose a portion
of an expression in parentheses ( ) to calculate that portion first.
4+3*2
Specifies an equation that equals 10.
(4+3)*2
Specifies an equation that equals 14.
AI232 evaluates both regular and boolean logic operators. Refer to Table 7-10 for a
list of all available operators in order of precedence.
Table 7-10 Operators in Order of Precedence
Operator
Description
#
Specifies a comment at the ends the alias macro expression.
*
/
%
Specifies a multiplication operation.
Specifies a division operation.
Specifies the remainder of a division operation.
+
-
Specifies an addition operation.
Specifies a subtraction operation.
Expressions that use the following operators return “0” for a false condition and “-1”
for true condition:
<<
<<=
=
>
>=
<<>
Specifies a less than evaluation.
Specifies a less than or equal to evaluation.
Specifies an equal to evaluation.
Specifies a greater than evaluation.
Specifies a greater than or equal to evaluation.
Specifies a not equal to evaluation.
7-21
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
Table 7-10 Operators in Order of Precedence (Continued)
Operator
Description
&
Specifies a boolean logical AND evaluation. This requires that two
conditions are true before continuing with the evaluation.
^
Specifies a boolean logical exclusive OR evaluation. This requires that
one condition or another (not both) is true before continuing with the
evaluation.
|
Specifies a boolean logical OR evaluation. This requires that one
condition or both conditions are true before continuing with the
evaluation.
!
Specifies a boolean logical NOT evaluation. This changes a true
condition to a false condition (and vice versa) before continuing with
the evaluation.
Functions
Functions are preset command keywords that perform string and value conversions.
Some functions can be entered with only a single character. For example, s and
switch represent the same function.
Note: Functions are not case-sensitive.
Table 7-11 lists available functions and their descriptions in alphabetical order.
Table 7-11 Alias Macro Functions
Alias Macro Function
Description of Operation
asc(string)
Returns the ASCII integer value of the first
character in a string.
chr$(n)
Returns the character that corresponds to ASCII
integer value n.
hex$(n)
Returns the hexadecimal equivalent to decimal
value n. For example, =hex$(31) returns hex value
1F.
or
h(n)
if(expression,a,b)
or
i(expression,a,b)
7-22
Returns a if expression is not zero or b if
expression is zero.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
Table 7-11 Alias Macro Functions (Continued)
Alias Macro Function
Description of Operation
left$(string,n)
l(string,n)
Returns the left-most n characters of string. If n is
greater than the length of string, the function
returns the entire string.
len(string)
Returns the length of string.
or
or
n(string)
mid$(string,x,n)
or
m(string,x,n)
mid$(string,x)
or
m(string,x)
Returns n characters from string starting with the
xth character. If x is greater than the length of
string, the function returns a null string. If fewer
than n characters follow character x, the function
returns to end of the string.
Returns characters from string starting with the
xth character and continuing to the right-most end
character. If x is greater than the length of string,
the function returns a null string.
myip(n)
Returns a string representation of the nth IP
address assigned to AI232. n must be greater than
0.
pos(string,char,n)
Returns the position of the nth occurrence of char
in string. If there are less than n occurrences of
char in string, the function returns the length of
string.
or
p(string,char,n)
right$(string,n)
r(string,n)
Returns the right-most n characters of string.
Returns the entire string if n is greater than the
length of the string.
str$(n)
Returns n converted into a decimal string.
or
or
d(n)
switch(target_exp,
default,exp1,result1,exp2
,result2...)
or
s(target_exp,default,exp1
,result1,exp2,result2...)
If target_exp matches exp1, the function returns
result1. If target_exp matches exp2, the function
returns result2. This continues through all pairs of
expressions and results. If target_exp does not
match any of the expressions, then default is
returned.
7-23
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
Table 7-11 Alias Macro Functions (Continued)
Alias Macro Function
Description of Operation
val(string)
Converts a string to its decimal integer value. For
example, =v(”032”) returns integer 32.
or
v(string)
?(n)
Returns the nth wildcard string from the alias
match.
Alias Macro Configuration
Often there are several ways to write a macro and get the same result. One
programmer will likely design macros differently than another.
Note: From the Alias Menu, you can input a string with * in it and the search will
break apart the string using * as a delimiter. The search checks the alias list
for an alias name that contains the components. It does not limit the search to
the beginning and end of text of the alias as in AI198.
Configuration Examples
This example displays an alias where:
z
z
z
Alias name 172.16.32.237#30* matches source address 172.16.32.237 with a
port number of 30 followed by zero or more characters
The caller’s address is PVC
Call data ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1) creates strings from ASY.1 to ASY.6.
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . . ..................................... 172.16.32.237#30*
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
7-24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................................
................................................... PVC
.......................................................
.............................. ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1)
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
This example displays an alias where:
z
z
Alias name 43042* matches source addresses that start with 43042 and may
end with zero or more characters
Called Address ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1) creates a called address string of
ASY.1 through ASY.6.
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . . ................................................ 43042*
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................................
.......................................................
.............................. ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1)
................................................. TOSUN
This example displays an alias where:
z
z
z
Alias name =L(A,P(A,’#’,1)-1)=MYIP(1) matches the base IP address of AI232
with any port number
Called address =’10.9.8.7#’+R(A,LEN(A)-P(A,’#’,1)) redirects the call to
10.9.8.7 with the same port number
Called protocol TN specifies that the Telnet protocol is used for the connection
to the called address.
Alias Edit Menu
Alias Name . . . . . ............. =L(A,P(A,’#’,1)-1)=MYIP(1)
Destination . .
Caller's Address
Called Address .
Call Data . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................
.......................................
... =’10.9.8.7#’+R(A,LEN(A)-P(A,’#’,1))
.......................................
Caller's Protocol ..........................................
Called Protocol . ....................................... TN
7-25
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros
7-26
AI232
8
AI232 Commands
This chapter provides information about each AI232 shell command and all AI198 winslc
commands that are supported by AI232. These commands perform AI232 system tasks.
Guide to this Chapter
Commands Overview
8-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview
Commands Overview
AI232 is configurable directly through the local system using shell commands or
through AI198 using winslc commands and the menu system.
Shell Commands
Shell commands offer some of the same functionality available in the AI232 local
menu system, including:
z
Creating, modifying, or deleting users and passwords
z
Accessing the AI232 menu
z
Configuring PVCs
z
Monitoring performance and diagnostic information
z
Pinging an IP address
z
Setting up an ARP table
z
Setting the trace level.
Shell Connections
Before using the shell commands, a shell connection to AI232 must be established.
You can connect locally using an asynchronous port on the AI232 front panel or
remotely using a Telnet connection.
Establishing a Local Shell Connection
Establish a local shell connection to AI232 through any port configured as a login port.
(By default, all ports are configured as login ports, but only port 1 is enabled.)
1. Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to
connect to AI232. For information on operating your particular terminal emulation
software, refer to the documentation provided with the program.
2. Set up your terminal emulation software to connect using COM port 1 (COM1).
3. Configure COM port 1 with the following parameters:
z
Bits per second: 9600
z
Data bits: 8
z
Parity: None
z
Stop bits: 1
z
Flow control: None
4. From within your terminal emulation software, press ENTER to request a login
prompt.
8-2
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview
5. At the login prompt, enter your user name.
6. At the password prompt, enter your password.
Notes: ai is the default user name and password. AI232 allows only five logins
using the default password. On the sixth login, AI232 will prompt you to
change the default password to a new password.
Keep a copy of your username and password in a safe place. If you lose
or forget your password on AI232 in standalone mode, you must call AI
customer service for assistance in gaining access to the card.
The destination menu appears.
7. Enter ai.
Establishing a Remote Shell Connection
Establish a remote shell connection to AI232 using AI198 command telnet or using
another Telnet client. To establish a Telnet session:
1. Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to
connect to AI232. For information on operating your particular terminal emulation
software, refer to the documentation provided with the program.
2. For user name, enter ai.
3. For password, enter ai. The destination menu appears.
4. For destination, enter ai. The [232] prompt appears.
winslc Commands
The winslc commands let the user communicate with AI232 from AI198. Use these
commands to enter data, diagnose problems, and retrieve information from AI232.
Displaying winslc Command Logging
To monitor winslc commands, press CTRL+l when logged into AI198 to turn on
logging.
8-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview
Using winslc Commands
To use winslc commands, the user must be logged into AI198 to receive output from
AI232. AI198 relays the command to AI232, which processes the command and
sends the result to the system log port (as configured in AI198 Menu 1.1). Valid winslc
commands are:
z
arp
z
pvclist
z
break
z
router
z
creset
z
show
z
diag-tconn
z
staeia
z
help
z
staslc
z
ip
z
tcpoutconn
z
link
z
telnet
z
panic
z
update
z
ping
z
xon-interval
From the AI198, you can view the available winslc commands by entering the
following command:
winslc baseport help
where baseport specifies the baseport number of AI232.
Log/Alarm Message Header
To obtain output from winslc commands, enable the activity/alarm log (AI198 Menu
1.1, menu item 01*The activity and alarm log is turned). The first line of the response
for most winslc commands shows the following standard log/alarm message header:
>@AI19807:42:26 081104 Sev=F Base=016 Msg:
Table 8-1 describes the Log/Alarm message header elements.
Table 8-1 Log/Alarm Message Header Elements
8-4
Header Element
Description
@AI198
Specifies the node name for the device that is producing the
log/alarm message (in this case, AI198).
7:42:26
Specifies the current time.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview
Table 8-1 Log/Alarm Message Header Elements (Continued)
Header Element
Description
081104
Specifies the current date.
Sev=F
Specifies the message severity level.
Base=016
Specifies the line card baseport number.
Msg
Introduces the log/alarm message.
8-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa account
aaa account
Description
This command enables or disables TACACS+ accounting of user login events and
shell command events. An accounting start packet or stop packet is issued each time
a user logs into or out of AI232. An accounting start packet is also issued for each
shell command that is run.
Note: If enabled, accounting is performed for all shell connection types (Async,
Telnet, and FTP), even if authentication is disabled. For information about
authentication, refer to command aaa authen on page 8-7.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa account { disable | enable }
Parameters
disable
Disables TACACS+ accounting.
enable
Enables TACACS+ accounting.
Command Defaults
Disabled TACACS+ accounting
Examples
This example displays the enabling of TACACS+ accounting.
[232]aaa account enable
[232]
8-6
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa authen
aaa authen
Description
This command enables or disables TACACS+ authentication for AI232 command
shell access. TACACS+ authentication may be enabled on all connections, or on a
connection type basis. By default, TACACS+ authentication is disabled on all
connection types.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa authen { enable | disable } [ all | async | telnet | ftp ]
Parameters
enable
Enables TACACS+ authentication.
disable
Disables TACACS+ authentication.
all
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on all connection types.
Note: If no connection type is specified, all is automatically selected.
async
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on asynchronous link
connections.
telnet
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on Telnet connections.
ftp
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on FTP connections.
Examples
This example displays the enabling of TACACS+ authentication on all connection
types.
[232]aaa authen enable
[232]
This example displays the disabling of TACACS+ authentication on asynchronous link
connections.
[232]aaa authen disable async
[232]
8-7
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa author
aaa author
Description
This command configures the TACACS+ authorization method for the AI232 shell.
The authorization method can be either privilege level or per-command. Privilege
level authorization is based on the priv-lvl returned from the TACACS+ server.
Per-command authorization requires AI232 to contact the TACACS+ server for each
shell command run by a user. Individual commands are then allowed or denied.
Note: Authorization is performed only on the connection types that have enabled
authentication. For information about enabling authentication, refer to
command aaa authen on page 8-7.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa author { priv-lvl | command }
Parameters
priv-lvl
Configures the TACACS+ authorization method based on the priv-lvl
returned from the TACACS+ server.
command
Configures the TACACS+ authorization method that requires AI232 to
contact the TACACS+ server for each shell command run by a user.
Individual commands are then allowed or denied.
Command Defaults
priv-lvl
Examples
This example displays the configuration of per-command TACACS+ authorization.
[232]aaa author command
[232]
8-8
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa chpass
aaa chpass
Description
This command changes the current user’s password on the TACACS+ server.
Note: The TACACS+ server may not support, or be configured to support, password
changes.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa chpass
Examples
This example displays a successful password change on a TACACS+ server.
[232] aaa chpass
Old Password:
New Password:
Re-enter New password:
Password Changed
Password Change was successful
[232]
8-9
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa fallback
aaa fallback
Description
This command enables or disables TACACS+ fallback for shell access. If TACACS+
fallback is enabled and attempts to contact all configured TACACS+ servers fail, then
AI232’s user database is used for authentication and authorization. The AI232 local
log file is used for accounting.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa fallback { disable | enable }
Parameters
disable
Disables TACACS+ fallback.
enable
Enables TACACS+ fallback.
Command Defaults
Enabled TACACS+ fallback
Examples
This example displays the disabling of TACACS+ fallback.
[232]aaa fallback disable
[232]
8-10
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa ppp authen
aaa ppp authen
Description
This command enables or disables TACACS+ authentication and sets the fallback
mode for specified AsyncPPP links.
Note: The link type must be set to AsyncPPP for this command to have any effect.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa ppp authen { link_range | * } { disable | enable | fallback }
Parameters
link_range
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.
*
Specifies all links.
disable
Disables TACACS+ authentication.
enable
Enables TACACS+ authentication with no fallback.
fallback
Enables TACACS+ authentication with fallback.
Command Defaults
Disabled (all links)
Examples
This example displays the enabling of TACACS+ authentication for link range
19,23-29.
[232]aaa ppp authen 19,23-29 enable
[232]
8-11
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa profile
aaa profile
Description
This command associates a custom profile with a privilege level or range of privilege
levels. The following rules apply:
z
TACACS+ privilege levels range from 0 to 15.
z
Custom profiles can be associated with privilege levels 2 through 14.
z
Privilege levels 2 through 14 default to the management system profile.
z
Privilege levels 0, 1, and 15 are reserved for the Status, Management, and
Supervisor system profiles (respectively).
For information on creating custom profiles, refer to command profile on page 8-78.
Privilege levels are used only if the authorization method is set to priv-lvl. The only
exception to this occurs under all of the following conditions:
1. The authentication server returns a privilege level.
2. The authorization server cannot be reached.
3. The authorization is set to per-command and fallback is enabled.
For information on configuring the authorization method, refer to command aaa
author on page 8-8.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa profile { priv_range } { profile_name | default }
Parameters
priv_range
Defines the range of privilege levels that will be associated with
the profile. Individual values are separated by commas (,) and
hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies privilege levels 1, 4, 5,
and 6.
profile_name
Specifies the name of an existing profile.
default
Removes the association between a range of privilege levels and
a profile.
Command Defaults
No associations configured
8-12
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa profile
Examples
This example associates privilege level 2 with profile newprof1:
[232] aaa profile 2 newprof1
[232]
This example associates privilege levels 3 to 6 and 14 with profile newprof2:
[232] aaa profile 3-6,14 newprof2
[232]
8-13
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa retry
aaa retry
Description
This command configures the number of consecutive connection attempts that are
made to a TACACS+ server before the attempt fails.
Note: Consecutive attempts are only made if the TACACS+ server responds but
refuses a connection. If no response is received from a TACACS+ server
before the configured timeout period, then no further connection attempts are
made. For information on configuring the timeout period, refer to command
aaa timeout on page 8-19
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa retry { retry_count | default }
Parameters
retry_count
Defines the number of consecutive connection attempts that are
made. Valid values are 1 to 100.
default
Resets the number of connection attempts to the default value.
Command Defaults
1 connection attempt
Examples
This example displays the configuration of consecutive connection attempts to 5.
[232] aaa retry 5
[232]
8-14
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa stats
aaa stats
Description
This command displays or clears AAA specific counters and statistics.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa stat [ clear ]
Parameters
clear
Clears all counters and statistics.
Examples
This example displays all AAA specific counters and statistics.
AAA Statistics
-------------Authentication Attempts: 0
Authentication Failures: 0
Authentication Fallbacks: 0
Authorization Attempts: 0
Authorization Failures: 0
Authorization Fallbacks: 0
Accounting Attempts: 0
Accounting Failures: 0
Accounting Fallbacks: 0
[232]
Display Item
Description
Authentication Attempts
Displays the number of TACACS+ authentication
attempts.
Authentication Failures
Displays the number of failed TACACS+ authentication
attempts.
Authentication Fallbacks
Displays the number of TACACS+ authentication
fallbacks, where AI232’s user database was used for
authentication instead of the TACACS+ server.
8-15
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa stats
8-16
Display Item
Description
Authorization Attempts
Displays the number of TACACS+ authorization
attempts.
Authorization Failures
Displays the number of failed TACACS+ authorization
attempts.
Authorization Fallbacks
Displays the number of TACACS+ authorization
fallbacks, where AI232’s user database was used for
authorization instead of the TACACS+ server.
Accounting Attempts
Displays the number of TACACS+ accounting attempts.
Accounting Failures
Displays the number of failed TACACS+ accounting
attempts.
Accounting Fallbacks
Displays the number of TACACS+ accounting fallbacks,
where AI232’s system log was used for accounting
instead of the TACACS+ server.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa summary
aaa summary
Description
This command displays a summary of all authentication, authorization, and
accounting settings.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa summary
Examples
This example displays a summary of all authentication, authorization, and accounting
settings.
[232] aaa summary
Async Shell Access:
Telnet Shell Access:
FTP Access:
Authorization:
Accounting:
Fallback:
AAA Timeout:
AAA Retry Count:
Priv-lvl 2:
Priv-lvl 3:
Priv-lvl 4:
Priv-lvl 5:
Priv-lvl 6:
Priv-lvl 14:
[232]
Local
Local
Local
Priv-lvl
Disabled
Disabled
15 seconds
5
newprof1
newprof2
newprof2
newprof2
newprof2
newprof2
Display Item
Description
Async Shell Access
Displays the status of asynchronous shell access as AAA
(TACACS+ authentication enabled) or local (TACACS+
authentication disabled).
Telnet Shell Access
Displays the status of Telnet shell access as AAA (TACACS+
authentication enabled) or local (TACACS+ authentication
disabled).
8-17
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa summary
Display Item
Description
FTP Access
Displays the status of FTP access as AAA (TACACS+
authentication enabled) or local (TACACS+ authentication
disabled).
Authorization
Displays the TACACS+ authorization method for the AI232
shell as Priv-lvl (based on the user’s privilege level) or
Per-command (based on per-command request/reply handling).
Accounting
Displays the TACACS+ accounting status of user login events
and shell command events as Enabled or Disabled.
Fallback
Displays the status of TACACS+ fallback as Enabled or
Disabled.
AAA Timeout
Displays the number of seconds AI232 will wait for a
response from a TACACS+ server. If no response is received
from the server in the allowed number of seconds, the
connection attempt fails.
AAA Retry Count
Displays the number of consecutive connection attempts that
are made to a TACACS+ server before the attempt fails.
Priv-lvl
8-18
settings
Displays the configured privilege levels with their associated
profiles.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: aaa timeout
aaa timeout
Description
This command configures the number of seconds to wait for a response from a
TACACS+ server. If no response is received from the server in the allowed number of
seconds, the connection attempt fails.
Command Type
shell
Formats
aaa timeout { timeout_value | default }
Parameters
timeout_value
Defines how long (in seconds) AI232 will wait for a response from
a TACACS+ server when a connection attempt is made. Valid
values are 1 to 120.
default
Resets the timeout value to its default.
Command Defaults
15 seconds
Examples
This example displays the configuration of the TACACS+ timeout value to 93 seconds.
[232]aaa timeout 93
[232]
8-19
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: alarm
alarm
Description
This command:
z
Displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity
z
Displays alarms for a specified alarm group or for a specified range of severity
levels within an alarm group
z
Displays alarms by severity level or for a specified range of severity levels
z
Clears all non-self-clearing alarm groups and the overall alarm severity
z
Clears a specified non-self-clearing alarm group
z
Masks a specified alarm group
z
Unmasks a specified alarm group.
Command Type
shell
Formats
alarm [ group [ range ] ]
alarm -sev [ range ]
alarm { -clear [ group ] | -mask group | -unmask group }
Parameters
group
Defines the group of alarms to display, clear, mask, or unmask. Valid
values are existing alarm groups.
range
Defines a range of alarm severity levels to display. Valid values are 1 to
32. Individual values in the range are separated by hyphens (-).
-sev
Displays all alarms or a range of alarms based severity level.
-clear
Clears all non-self-clearing alarm groups or a specified non-self-clearing
alarm group.
Note: Only non-self-clearing alarm groups can be manually cleared.
Self-clearing alarms clear themselves when the problem that
caused the alarm is resolved.
8-20
-mask
Prevents a specified alarm group from affecting overall alarm severity.
-unmask
Allows a specified alarm group to affect overall alarm severity.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: alarm
Examples
This example displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity.
[232] alarm
Alarm Group Sev Date & Time Message (most recent, most severe in group)
----------- --- ----------- ---------------------------------------------*general
0 00-00 00:00
links
0 06-05 21:19 Link 3 up.
----------- --- ----------- ---------------------------------------------*not self-clearing
() masked
Overall alarm severity: 0
[232]
This example displays all system alarms in group links.
[232] alarm links
Num Sev Date & Time
--- --- ----------1 0 00-00 00:00
2 0 00-00 00:00
3 0 00-00 00:00
4 0 00-00 00:00
5 0 00-00 00:00
6 0 00-00 00:00
7 0 00-00 00:00
8 0 00-00 00:00
9 0 00-00 00:00
10 0 00-00 00:00
11 0 00-00 00:00
12 0 00-00 00:00
13 0 01-26 15:34
14 0 01-26 15:34
15 0 00-00 00:00
16 0 00-00 00:00
17 0 00-00 00:00
18 0 00-00 00:00
19 0 00-00 00:00
20 0 00-00 00:00
21 0 00-00 00:00
22 0 00-00 00:00
23 0 00-00 00:00
24 0 00-00 00:00
25 0 00-00 00:00
26 0 00-00 00:00
27 0 00-00 00:00
28 0 00-00 00:00
29 0 00-00 00:00
30 0 00-00 00:00
31 0 00-00 00:00
32 0 00-00 00:00
--- --- ----------'links' alarm group
[232]
Message
------------------------------------------
Link 13 up.
Link 14 up.
---------------------------------------------severity: 0
8-21
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: alarm
This example displays alarms for links 5-8 in group links.
[232]alarm links 5-8
Num Sev Date & Time
--- --- ----------5 4 06-13 14:40
6 0 06-13 14:40
7 0 06-13 14:40
8 0 06-13 14:40
--- --- ----------'links' alarm group
[232]
Message
-----------------------------------------Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.
Link 6 up.
Link 7 up.
Link 8 up.
-----------------------------------------severity: 4
This example displays all alarms by severity level.
[232]alarm -sev
Alarm Group Num Sev Date & Time Message
----------- --- --- ----------- ---------------------------------------------links
1 4 06-13 14:40 Link 1 is enabled but has not come up.
links
5 4 06-13 14:40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.
links
10 4 06-13 14:40 Link 10 is enabled but has not come up.
links
12 4 06-13 14:40 Link 12 is enabled but has not come up.
general
1 6 06-13 14:40 Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board
----------- --- --- ----------- ---------------------------------------------( ) masked
[232]
This example displays all alarms that have a severity level between 4 and 7.
[232]alarm -sev
Alarm Group Num
----------- --links
1
links
5
links
10
links
12
general
1
----------- --( ) masked
[232]
4-7
Sev
--4
4
4
4
6
---
Date & Time
----------06-13 14:40
06-13 14:40
06-13 14:40
06-13 14:40
06-13 14:40
-----------
Message
---------------------------------------------Link 1 is enabled but has not come up.
Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.
Link 10 is enabled but has not come up.
Link 12 is enabled but has not come up.
Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board
----------------------------------------------
This example displays the clearing of all non-self-clearing alarm groups.
[232] alarm -clear
Alarm groups cleared.
Overall alarm severity set to 0.
[232]
This example displays the clearing of non-self-clearing alarm group general.
[232] alarm -clear general
Alarm group cleared.
[232]
8-22
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: alarm
This example displays the prevention of alarm group links from affecting the overall
alarm severity.
[232]alarm -mask links
Alarm group masked.
[232]alarm
This example displays the unmasking of alarm group links.
[232]alarm -unmask links
Alarm group unmasked.
[232]
8-23
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: arp
arp
Description
This command displays, deletes, or adds entries in the ARP cache.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell:
arp -a [ ip_address ]
arp -d ip_address
arp -s ip_address mac_address
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport arp -a [ ip_address ]
winslc baseport arp -d ip_address
winslc baseport arp -s ip_address mac_address
Parameters
8-24
-a
Displays all entries in the ARP cache table or just the ip_address
entry.
ip_address
Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal
format.
-d
Deletes an entry from the ARP cache table.
-s
Adds a permanent entry to the ARP cache for the current session.
Permanent entries must be in the same subnetwork as the IP
address of the destination device.
mac_address
Defines the MAC address of the destination device.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: arp
Examples
This example displays all ARP cache entries.
[232] arp -a
Internet Address
172.16.52.16
172.16.2.9
[232]
Ethernet Address
00-00-92-90-F2-D9
00-40-72-00-7F-96
Type
temp
temp
Life
5 mins
2 mins
Column
Description
Internet Address
Displays the IP address of the destination device.
Ethernet Address
Displays the MAC address of the destination device.
Type
Displays the type of ARP cache entry as perm or temp. Type temp
specifies that the entry is temporary and will be deleted when the
time interval specified in the Life column expires. Type perm
specifies that the entry was entered by the user with the -s
option. This entry will not expire and can be removed using the
-d delete option.
Note: Resetting AI232 clears both permanent and temporary
entries.
Life
Displays the time interval for which the temporary entry will
remain in the ARP cache.
This example displays an ARP cache entry with IP address 172.16.31.100.
[232] arp -a 172.16.31.100
Internet Address
172.16.31.100
[232]
Ethernet Address
08-00-09-7B-88-0C
Type
temp
Life
5 mins
This example displays the configuration of an ARP cache entry with IP address
172.16.31.106 and MAC address 08-00-09-4a-c5-5a.
[232] arp -s 172.16.31.106 08-00-09-4a-c5-5a
172.16.31.106 mapped to Ethernet address 08-00-09-4A-C5-5A
[232]
8-25
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: arp
This example displays the deletion of an ARP cache entry with IP address
172.16.30.117.
[232] arp -d 172.16.30.117
Mapping for 172.16.30.117 deleted
[232]
8-26
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: break
break
Description
This command terminates an asynchronous or shell connection. Use command diagtconn on page 8-55 (not command who on page 8-123) when referencing
connections and connection ID numbers.
Note: This command only works for calls connected to the shell.
CAUTION: This command operates without regard to current activity on the serial
port.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
break { link_number | connection_origin }
break -id id_number
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport break { link_number | connection_origin }
winslc baseport break -id id_number
Parameters
link_number
Defines the link number for the connection being terminated.
connection_origin
Defines the IP address and port number of the device
connection being terminated.
id_number
Defines the ID number of the device connection being
terminated.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
8-27
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: break
Examples
This example displays the termination of a shell connection for a device with IP
address 10.40.5.11 and port number 1821.
[232]break 10.40.5.11#1821
Breaking connection: 10.40.5.11#1821
[232]
This example displays the termination of a connection for a device with ID 65.
[232]break -id 65
Breaking connection with ID:
[232]
8-28
65
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: creset
creset
Description
This command resets the error counters for a link or a range of links. There is no
output for this command. To see if the error counters were reset for the links you
specified, enter command staslc on page 8-92.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
creset range
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport creset range
Parameters
range
Defines the link or a range of links being reset. Valid values are:
z A single link number (for example, 3 to reset error counters for link
3)
z A series of link numbers separated by commas (for example, 1,2,3
to reset error counters for links 1, 2, and 3)
z A range of link numbers separated by a dash (for example, 1-2 to
reset error counters for links 1 and 2)
z Any combination of a single link number, series, and/or range (for
example, 1,2-3 to reset error counters for links 1, 2, and 3)
z * to reset error counters for all links.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
Examples
This example displays the resetting of error counters for links 5 to 7.
[232]creset 5-7
[232]
8-29
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: date
date
Description
This command sets and displays the date and the time for AI232 when it is operating
in standalone mode.
Command Types
shell
Formats
date
Examples
This example displays the configuration of date 08-04-2005 and time 10:24:49 for AI232
in standalone mode.
[232]date
Today is Thursday 05-01-2004 01:09:52
Please enter the date and/or time.
Use 'MM-DD-YYYY' and/or 'hh:mm:ss' (24-hour format): 08-04-2005 10:24:49
[232]
8-30
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: debug
debug
Description
This command enables or disables the logging of debugging data.
Tip: You have to have logging turned on to view debug information from a shell
connection.
Command Type
shell
Formats
debug { alias | x25 | pvcfsm | asypvcfsm | nlipvcfsm | tpifsm |
modmuxfsm | allfsm | pppfsm | linkChange | bootp | all } { on | off }
Parameters
alias
Enables or disables the logging of alias translation debugging data.
x25
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
pvcfsm
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
asypvcfsm
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
nlipvcfsm
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
tpifsm
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
modmuxfsm
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
allfsm
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
pppfsm
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.
bootp
Enables or disables the logging of bootp attempts so that users can
determine if the bootp process is still underway or if it has been
completed.
linkChange
Enables or disables the logging of debugging data when the PPP
protocol on a link has gone down.
all
Enables or disables the logging of all debugging data.
on
Enables the logging of specified debugging data.
off
Disables the logging of specified debugging data.
8-31
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: debug
Examples
This example displays the enabling of all debug data logging.
[232]debug all on
debug alias is on
debug pvcfsm is on
debug asypvcfsm is on
debug nlipvcfsm is on
debug tpifsm is on
debug modmuxfsm is on
debug allfsm is on
debug pppfsm is on
debug linkChange is on
debug bootp is on
[232]
8-32
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: delete
delete
Description
This command deletes a specified file that resides on AI232.
Command Type
shell
Formats
delete filename
Parameters
filename
Defines the name of the file to delete.
Examples
This example displays the deletion of file log.txt.
[232]delete log.txt
Are you sure you want to delete 'log.txt'? (y/n) y
log.txt deleted.
[232]
8-33
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-conn
diag-conn
Description
This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for
each link. Data can be displayed continuously, one page at a time, or sent to the
screen one time only for all connections. The default mode is a continuous display.
Command Type
shell
Formats
diag-conn
Examples
This example displays existing connections across AI232.
C O N N E C T I O N S
Mode: Continuous
103. ASY.1.1
113. TCP 172.16.2.9#1032
[Search Inactive]
[ Idle
]
<--Data Transfer-->
SHELL
Enter S-kip, I-nternal, A-ll, M-ore, D-etail, F-ind, P-revPg, N-extPg or Q-uit:
Note: For explanations of the states shown, such as idle and data
section pvclist on page 8-80.
8-34
transfer,
refer to
Display Item
Description
S-kip
This option bypasses connections. It gives a prompt for the number
of connections to skip.
I-nternal
This option toggles between I-nternal and H-ide Int. I-nternal
displays all the internal loopback connections along with other
connections.
A-ll
This option displays all connections without page breaks. The
display does not show duplicate connections. For example, if
connection number 15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30
to 15 will not appear.
M-ore
This option toggles between M-ore and L-ess. It displays the link and
PVC number for X.25 PVCs, the link and X.121 addresses for X.25
SVCs, and the alias used to make the connection.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-conn
Display Item
Description
D-etail
This option prompts for the ID of the connection to view and
displays details for that connection.
F-ind
This option displays specific types of connections. F-ind indicates
text matches that are applied to the display lines. The matching is
not case-sensitive. The logic for the matches can be AND or OR.
PATTERN 1, LOGIC 2, and PATTERN 3 are evaluated before
LOGIC 4 and PATTERN 5 are considered.
P-revPg
This option displays the previous page of connections. Twenty
connections per page appear. The numbers that appear in front of
the description (for example, 103. and 113.) are relative numbers
and do not represent any particular link, port, or PVC. The display
does not show duplicate connections. For example, if connection
number 15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30 to 15 will not
appear.
N-extPg
This option displays the next page of connections. Twenty
connections per page appear. The numbers that appear in front of
the description (for example, 103. and 113.) are relative numbers
and do not represent any particular link, port, or PVC. The display
does not show duplicate connections. For example, if connection
15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30 to 15 will not appear.
Q-uit
This option exits the command display and returns the user to the
prompt.
8-35
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
diag-eth
Description
This command monitors and displays Ethernet diagnostic information.
Using Interpretation Mode
There are three levels of diagnostic information:
z
Minimum—Displays minimal diagnostic information (mostly the packet’s source
and destination). This is the default interpretation mode setting.
z
Medium—Displays protocol fields that are likely to change for each packet, as
well as those with values that are out of the ordinary.
z
Maximum—Displays all protocol fields.
To configure interpretation mode:
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.
2. Enter interpret minimum, interpret medium, interpret maximum, or
interpret.
Tip: Entering interpret with no additional parameter toggles interpretation off
and on. When interpretation is toggled from off to on, the diagnostic level is
set to the minimum level (the default).
Using the Timestamp Option
Timestamps can be configured to appear on the diagnostic display. The time that
appears is the number of days, hours, minutes, seconds, and thousandths of a
second since AI232 was last reset.
To enable or disable timestamp display:
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.
2. Enter timestamp to toggle between enabling and disabling the display of the
timestamp.
Using Promiscuous Mode
Promiscuous mode can be enabled or disabled during Ethernet diagnostic sessions.
By disabling promiscuous mode, only packets traveling on the network that are
destined for your Ethernet card appear. By enabling promiscuous mode, all the
packets traveling on the network appear.
To enable and disable promiscuous mode:
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.
8-36
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
2. Enter promiscuous to toggle between enabling and disabling promiscuous mode.
Note: Operating AI232 in the promiscuous mode can reduce performance. The
default setting is disabled promiscuous mode. AI232 automatically returns
to the default setting (promiscuous mode disabled) when the user quits
the diag-eth command.
Using the Help Option
To obtain command help:
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.
2. Enter help. The diag-eth help screen appears.
Configuring Filters
While using the diag-eth command, various filters can be defined to display specific
or general diagnostic information.
Tip: There is help associated with the filter command. To view this help, enter
filter after you enter diag-eth. The filter help screen appears.
Important: If you are connecting to AI232 using Telnet, remember to filter out the
traffic associated with the telnet connection. Failure to do so can cause
the diagnostic program to become overloaded, which makes AI232
unresponsive.
To configure a filter:
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.
2. Enter the desired filter. Refer to section Formats on page 8-38 for information on
filter formats.
Capturing Data
While using the diag-eth command, data can be captured for Ethernet diagnostics.
All variables and filters can be configured for specific or general information capture.
To configure data capture:
1. Define the following settings:
z
Interpretation Mode
z
Timestamp Mode
z
Promiscuous Mode
z
Data Mode
z
Filters
8-37
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
2. Enter go. The system starts capturing data with the user-defined settings and
filters.
3. Enter stop to stop capturing data.
Exiting the diag-eth Session
To exit the diag-eth session, type quit. The [232] prompt appears.
Command Type
shell
Formats
diag-eth
The following formats apply to filters:
filter { add | delete } [ src mac_address ] [ dst mac_address ]
filter { add | delete } [ src ip_address ] [ dst ip_address ]
filter { add | delete } [ src ip_address#port_number ]
[ dst ip_address#port_number ]
filter { add | delete } [ src *#port_number ] [ dst *#port_number ]
filter { add | delete } protocol [ ip | tcp | udp | icmp | arp | osi ]
filter { add | delete } all
filter list
Parameters
8-38
add
Adds a filter.
delete
Deletes a filter.
src
Defines the source address (MAC, IP, or TCP/UDP)
for the filter being created.
mac_address
Defines the MAC address to use for either the source
or destination of the filter being created.
dst
Defines the destination address (MAC, IP, or
TCP/UDP) for the filter being created.
ip_address
Defines the IP address to use for either the source or
destination of the filter being created.
ip_address#port_number
Defines the IP address and the TCP/UDP port number
for either the source or destination of the filter being
created.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
*#port_number
Defines the TCP/UDP port number regardless of the
MAC/IP address settings.
protocol
Adds or deletes a specific protocol filter. Available
protocol filters are:
z ip
z tcp
z udp
z icmp
z arp
z osi.
all
Deletes all the filters or adds a filter to show all
Ethernet traffic.
list
Lists all the filters in the system.
Examples
This example displays the configuration of diagnostic interpretation level medium for the
Ethernet diagnostic session display.
[232]diag-eth
interpret medium
Interpretation is now set to MEDIUM.
This example displays the enabling and disabling of the timestamp display.
[232]diag-eth
timestamp
Timestamps will now be displayed.
timestamp
Timestamps will no longer be displayed.
This example displays the enabling and disabling of promiscuous mode.
[232]diag-eth
promiscuous
The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode.
promiscuous
The ethernet chip is now in normal mode.
8-39
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
This example displays Ethernet diagnostic help information.
[232]diag-eth
help
Commands for diag-eth:
interpret
Turn on data interpretation.
quit
Exit diag-eth.
help
Display this help text.
data
Toggle uninterpreted data display.
timestamp
Toggle data timestamping.
go
Begin data capturing.
stop
Terminate data capturing.
filter
Add a data filter.
promiscuous Toggle promiscuous mode for the ethernet chip.
This example displays the help associated with the Ethernet diagnostic filter
command.
[232]diag-eth
filter
Usage: FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
FILTER
<ADD|DELETE>
<ADD|DELETE>
<ADD|DELETE>
<ADD|DELETE>
<ADD|DELETE>
<ADD|DELETE>
LIST
Where:
<mac>
<ipAddr>
<port>
8-40
[SRC <mac>] [DST <mac>]
[SRC <ipAddr>] [DST <ipAddr>]
[SRC <ipAddr#port>] [DST <ipAddr#port>]
[SRC <*#port>] [DST <*#port>]
PROTOCOL <IP|TCP|UDP|ICMP|ARP|OSI>
ALL
is the MAC address desired, with the format
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX, with each 'X' representing
a hexidecimal digit.
is the desired IP address, with the format
X.X.X.X, where 0 < X < 256.
is the desired TCP port.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following parameters
are entered:
z
interpret max
z
timestamp
z
z
z
z
z
to set maximum interpretation
to enable timestamping
promiscuous to enable promiscuous mode
filter add src 172.16.2.9 to add a filter for address 172.16.2.9
data to display data
go to start the data capture
stop to stop capturing data.
[232]diag-eth
interpret max
Interpretation is now set to MAXIMUM.
timestamp
Timestamps will now be displayed.
promiscuous
The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode.
filter add src 172.16.2.9
New filter added.
data
Uninterpreted data will now be displayed.
go
---------------------------------------------------------------------Timestamp: 0d 00:31:25.356
<- Ethernet: [ 00:40:72:00:7F:96 ] -> [ 00:00:0C:7E:F2:72 ]
Protocol [ 0x0800:IP ]
IP:
[ 172.16.2.9 ] -> [ 172.16.0.1 ]
Version [ 4 ]
Header Length [ 20 bytes ]
Type-Of-Service [ none ]
Identifier [ 37903 ]
Fragmentation Flags [ none ] Offset [ 0 bytes ]
Time-To-Live [ 60 hops ]
Protocol [ 0x01:ICMP ]
ICMP:
Type [ 8 ] Code [ 0 ]
(echo request)
00 00 48 44 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C
..HDABCDEFGHIJKL
4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42
MNOPQRSTUVWXYZAB
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52
CDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
STUVWXYZABCDEFGH
49 4A 4B 4C
IJKL
---------------------------------------------------------------------stop
8-41
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered:
z
filter add src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9
to configure a filter with source MAC address
00:40:72:00:d2:d9
z
filter add dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9
z
address 00:40:72:00:d2:d9
go to start the capture
stop to end the capture.
z
to configure a filter with destination MAC
[232]diag-eth
filter add src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9
New filter added.
filter add dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9
New filter added.
go
---------------------------------------------------------------------<- 01 80 C2 00 00 00 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 26 42 42
.......@r....&BB
03 00 00 00 00 81 00 20 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 00
....... .@r.....
00 00 00 20 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 80 65 00 00 07 00
... [email protected]....
09 00 0F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
............
---------------------------------------------------------------------<- 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 40 72 00 7F 96 08 00 45 00
.@[email protected].
00 29 0F 81 00 00 3C 06 F4 8A AC 10 02 09 AC 10
.)....<.........
20 9A 04 16 00 17 75 87 E4 2F 30 E0 B6 B4 50 10
.....u../0...P.
08 00 A6 96 00 00 41 0D 01 B4 6D 74 01 B4 FF FC
......A...mt....
---------------------------------------------------------------------<- stop
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered:
z
filter add protocol tcp
z
go
z
stop
to configure a filter with a defined TCP protocol
to start the capture
to end the capture.
[232]diag-eth
filter add protocol tcp
New filter added.
go
---------------------------------------------------------------------<- 00 A0 C9 22 D8 C4 00 00 92 B6 2F 97 08 00 45 2C
..."....../...E,
00 6C CF B7 40 00 80 06 69 4B AC 10 37 14 AC 10
[email protected]...
32 28 10 9A 00 8B 01 67 55 24 00 D0 5D 81 50 18
2(.....gU$..].P.
1E 59 5C 61 00 00 00 00 00 40 FF 53 4D 42 2B 00
.Y\[email protected]+.
00 00 00 18 03 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
................
00 00 07 08 FE CA 02 10 41 0F 01 01 00 1B 00 4C
........A......L
57 4F 20 43 57 20 56 4C 4F 20 44 45 4F 20 4D 41
WO CW VLO DEO MA
57 20 4C 4D 57 20 41 52 57 00
W LMW ARW.
---------------------------------------------------------------------stop
8-42
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-eth
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when filter
display all filters.
list
is entered to
[232]diag-eth
filter list
Filters currently being used by diag-eth:
protocol tcp
dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9
src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9
dst 172.16.2.9
src 172.16.2.9
protocol tcp
This example displays the deletion of filter protocol
tcp.
[232]diag-eth
filter delete protocol tcp
Filter 'protocol tcp' has been deleted.
This example displays the deletion of all filters.
[232]diag-eth
filter delete all
Filter 'dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9' has been deleted.
Filter 'src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9' has been deleted.
Filter 'dst 172.16.2.9' has been deleted.
Filter 'src 172.16.2.9' has been deleted.
8-43
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
diag-info
Description
This command displays diagnostic information for asynchronous, Ethernet, and TCP
connections as well as for memory. Different screens of information can be viewed
depending on the command option that is entered. The screens display the state of
serial links and system updates once per second. The available display options are M,
A, E, and T. They display the following information:
z
Option M displays the STREAMS allocation and memory information.
z
Option A displays asynchronous information. This is the default display.
z
Option E displays Ethernet information.
z
Option T displays TCP data.
Note: Type X to exit the command display.
Command Type
shell
Formats
diag-info
8-44
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
Examples
This example displays diagnostic information for STREAMS allocation and memory,
which are accessed by typing M.
NAME
Queues
Streams
Bufcalls
Timeouts
Message blocks
Data blocks:
Class 0
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
Class 5
Class 6
Extended
S T R E A M S
FREE
ALLOC
8361
239
2085
115
64
0
2387
13
16015
369
1519
4080
14944
9981
500
390
1
350
17
16
56
19
0
260
1
0
A L L O C A T I O N
%FREE
USED
FAIL
97
1073
0
94
532
0
100
0
0
99
402908
0
97
588495
0
98
99
99
99
100
60
50
100
7954
835
301866
11034
0
222746
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HWM
241
116
0
45
551
40
18
64
32
0
263
1
0
S Y S T E M
A L L O C A T I O N
(alloc failed=0)
REGION:
ASIZ
CNT CNT_HWM
USED USED_HWM UNIT_SIZE
AI1
741664
324
424
17632
20704
32
AI2
741664
0
0
0
0
32
AI3
741664
32
36 179296
180832
32
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:
Column
Description
NAME
Displays the name of the STREAMS resource.
FREE
Displays the number of free or available STREAMS resources.
ALLOC
Displays the number of STREAMS resources allocated at the time of
the display.
%FREE
Displays the percentage of free or available STREAMS resources.
USED
Displays the number of STREAMS resources used since AI232 was
last reset.
FAIL
Displays the number of times an allocation failed.
HWM
Displays the highest number of resources ever allocated at one time.
REGION
Displays the memory allocation regions.
ASIZ
Displays the size of the memory allocation regions in bytes.
CNT
Displays the number of blocks allocated from a region (regardless of
size).
8-45
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
Column
Description
CNT_HWM
Displays the highest number of blocks allocated since AI232 was last
reset.
USED
Displays the number of bytes currently allocated from a region.
USED_HWM
Displays the highest number of bytes allocated since AI232 was last
reset.
UNIT_SIZE
Displays the size in bytes of the memory units that can be allocated.
This example displays diagnostic information for asynchronous connections, which is
accessed by typing A. This is the default display.
ASYNC DIAG INFO
LINK
STATE
BYTES_IN
BYTES_OUT
LINK
1
1
0
0
16
2
1
0
0
17
3
1
0
0
18
4
0
0
0
19
5
0
0
0
20
6
0
0
0
21
7
0
0
0
22
8
0
0
0
23
9
0
0
0
24
10
0
0
0
25
11
0
0
0
26
12
0
0
0
27
13
0
0
0
28
14
0
0
0
29
15
0
0
0
30
16
0
0
0
31
17
0
0
0
32
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:
8-46
STATE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BYTES_IN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BYTES_OUT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Column
Description
LINK
Displays the link number.
STATE
Displays the state of the driver. Two states are available:
z 0 specifies that the link is not established.
z 1 specifies that the link is enabled. The link does not have to have a
connection to be enabled.
BYTE_IN
Displays the number of bytes coming into the link.
BYTE_OUT
Displays the number of bytes going out of the link.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
This example displays diagnostic information for the front panel Ethernet interface,
which is accessed by typing E.
ETHERNET 0
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
LG frame length violation: ---0
NO nonoctet aligned frame: ---0
SH short frame (runt): -------0
CR CRC error: ----------------0
OV overrun: ------------------0
CL collision: ----------------0
BSY buffers exhausted: -------0
frames missed: ---------------0
frames received: -------------0
bytes received: --------------0
Tx RL retry limit exceeded: -----0
Tx RC collisions: ---------------0
Tx UN underruns: ----------------0
Tx LC late collisions:-----------0
Tx CSL carrier sense lost: ------2451095
Tx queued buffers: --------------0
Tx frames sent: -----------------2451095
Tx bytes sent: ------------------233814304
Unexpected interrupts: ----------0
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:
Display Item
Description
Rx LG frame length violation
Displays the number of frame length violations in
received packets.
Rx NO nonoctet aligned frame
Displays the number of misaligned, received frames.
Rx SH short frame (runt)
Displays the number of short received frames.
Rx CR CRC error
Displays the number of packets received that have
had CRC errors.
Rx OV overrun
Displays the number of packets not received by the
interface because of a receiver overrun.
Rx CL collision
Displays the transmit collisions on received frames.
This is the number of times the Ethernet device goes
to transmit but cannot because someone else is
already transmitting.
Rx BSY buffers exhausted
Displays the number of times all receive buffers
were used, but more were required.
Rx frames missed
Displays the number of frames that were supposed
to be received, but were missed.
8-47
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
8-48
Display Item
Description
Rx frames received
Displays the number of frames received on the
connection.
Rx bytes received
Displays the number of bytes received on the
connection.
Tx RL retry limit exceeded
Displays the number of times transmitted frames
exceeded the retry limit.
Tx RC collisions
Displays the number of transmit collisions. This is
the number of times the Ethernet device goes to
transmit but cannot because someone else is
already transmitting.
Tx UN underruns
This displays the number of times the transmitter
has run out of data due to the system being busy.
Tx LC late collisions
Displays the number of late collisions on transmitted
frames.
Tx CSL carrier sense lost
Displays the number of times that the carrier sense
was lost.
Tx queued buffers
Displays the number of queued buffers.
Tx frames sent
Displays the number of frames that were
transmitted.
Tx bytes sent
Displays the number of bytes that were transmitted.
Unexpected interrupts
Displays the number of times that the transfer of
frames was unexpectedly interrupted.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
This example displays diagnostic information for the Ethernet sonic chip in use on this
card (SONIC0), which is accessed by typing E.
SONIC0
frames_received
2133706
2451073
bytes_received
204088549 233809600
frames_sent
317511
bytes_sent
38293966
0
collisions
116
0
transmit_errors
0
0
crc_errors
0
0
alignment_errors
0
0
missed_packets
0
0
rx_buffers_exhausted 0
0
heartbeatlost
0
0
rx_overruns
0
0
rba_exceeded
0
0
current_tda
8
ex_defers
0
0
ex_coll
0
0
tx_underruns
0
0
bad_tx_size
0
0
tx_blocked
0
2451086
tx_delayed
0
0
state
2
2451086
eth intr stuck: 0----------------233812081
Display Item
Description
frames_received
Displays the number of frames received on the connection.
bytes_received
Displays the number of bytes received on the connection.
Note: This field displays a negative number after it reaches
a count of 2,147,483,647. This is normal operation
and does not indicate an error.
frames_sent
Displays the number of frames sent from the connection.
bytes_sent
Displays the number of bytes sent from the connection.
Note: This field displays a negative number after it reaches
a count of 2,147,483,647. This is normal operation
and does not indicate an error.
collisions
Displays the number of transmit collisions. This is the
number of times the Ethernet device goes to transmit but
cannot because someone else is already transmitting.
transmit_errors
Displays the number of transmit errors that have occurred.
8-49
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
8-50
Display Item
Description
crc_errors
Displays the number of packets received that have had CRC
errors.
alignment_errors
Displays the number of alignment errors.
missed_packets
Displays the number of missed packets.
rx_buffers_exhausted
Displays the number of times all receive buffers were used,
but more were required.
heartbeatlost
Displays if there is an error between the Ethernet interface
and the Ethernet transceiver.
rx_overruns
Displays the number of packets not received by the interface
because of a receiver overrun.
rba_exceeded
Displays the number of times that the maximum number of
receive buffers have been exceeded.
current_tda
Displays the current data area being transmitted.
ex_defers
Displays the number of times that the maximum limit on the
excessive deferral timer is exceeded. An excessive deferral
error is recorded when the following events occur:
z A transmission attempt is made while another node is
transmitting.
z The transmit period is longer than the excessive deferral
timer limit.
ex_coll
Displays the number of times an excessive collision has
been recorded. An excessive collision is recorded when a
transmit attempt occurs 16 times and a collision occurs each
time.
tx_underruns
Displays the number of times the transmitter has run out of
data due to the system being busy.
bad_tx_size
Displays the number of times the transmit byte count was
incorrect.
tx_blocked
Displays a 1 if the transmitter is blocked. Otherwise, a 0 is
displayed.
tx_delayed
Displays the number of times the transmitter has been
blocked.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-info
Display Item
Description
state
Displays the current state of the Ethernet interface. The
following values may appear:
z 0—The Ethernet interface is uninitialized.
z 1—The Ethernet interface is idle.
z 2—The Ethernet interface is active.
z 3—The Ethernet interface needs to be reset.
eth intr stuck
Displays the number of times the Ethernet interface interrupt
has stuck while servicing the interrupt.
This example displays diagnostic information for TCP data, which is accessed by
typing T.
T C P / I P
I N F O
Copied ethernet receive packet:
TCP keepalive failed:
TCP max keepalive tries:
Dropped SNMP request:
0
0
1
0
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:
Display Item
Description
Copied ethernet receive packet:
Displays the number of copied Ethernet receive
packets.
TCP keepalive failed:
Displays the number of TCP keep-alive
messages that have been sent and were
expected to be received, but were not received.
TCP max keepalive tries:
Displays the maximum number of TCP keep-alive
messages received on the connection.
Dropped SNMP request:
Displays the number of dropped SNMP requests.
8-51
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-line
diag-line
Description
This command monitors incoming and outgoing asynchronous traffic and displays
diagnostic information for the traffic. A help screen provides a list of commands
available for line monitoring diagnostics.
CAUTION: The line monitor degrades the performance of AI232. Do not use this
command in heavy traffic situations in which performance is crucial.
Note: Information from the line monitor diagnostic mode only appears when data is
passed on serial links. If no data is passed, the screen is blank.
Table 8-2 displays the line monitor mode options that can be entered after diag-line
is entered.
Table 8-2 Line Monitor Mode Options
Option
Function
data
Toggles the display of data on or off.
modem
Toggles the display of modem signals on or off.
t
Toggles the display of a timestamp for each frame of data
displayed on or off.
h
or r
h lx
Hides (h) or reveals (r) all lines on AI232.
or r
Hides (h) or reveals (r) a specified line (x).
r lx y
Reveals a specified LCN (y) on a specified line (x).
r lx y z
Reveals a range of specified LCNs (y through z) on a
specified line (x).
h lx y
- or r lx y -
Hides or reveals all LCNs from a specified LCN (y) on up on a
specified line (x).
h lx -y
or r lx -y
Hides or reveals all LCNs from 0 to a specified LCN (y) on a
specified line (x).
filterL2
8-52
lx
Toggles the filtering of level 2 frames without packet
information on or off.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-line
Table 8-2 Line Monitor Mode Options (Continued)
Option
Function
interpret [ a | x ]
Toggles the display of decoded packet data on the line
monitor on or off and optionally selects the format of the data
in the data portion of the packet (a or x).
z a displays the data in the data portion of the packet in
ASCII/hexadecimal format. Unprintable data
(hexadecimal values 0x00 to 0x20 and 0x7F to 0xFF)
appears as two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by
a space. Printable data appears as printable characters.
This option only applies to data.
z x displays all the data in the data portion of the packet in
hexadecimal format. All data appears as two-digit
hexadecimal numbers separated by a space. This option
only applies to data.
print
Prints the range of revealed LCNs for all lines.
CTRL+s
Pauses the line monitor.
go
or CTRL+q
Reactivates the line monitor after displaying the line monitor
options.
ESC or q
Quits monitoring traffic, exits from the line monitor, and
returns to the prompt.
?
Displays a list of the options available for line monitoring
diagnostics.
Tip: Press ENTER to execute a command and press ESC to end the diagnostic
session.
CAUTION: If you are connected to AI232 through a serial port, do not monitor the
port with command diag-line. Use command hide to hide and not
monitor the port. Failure to comply with this statement can cause AI232
to become unresponsive.
Command Type
shell
Formats
diag-line
8-53
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-line
Examples
This example displays a typical default line monitor display for asynchronous data.
06>d FF
59
59
00
00
06<d FF
77
00
06>d FF
D3
D3
00
00
06>d FF
D3
D3
00
00
03
0C
0C
00
00
03
00
14
03
5D
5D
00
00
03
5D
5D
00
00
00
08
AC
00
31
06
10
00
00
00
32
00
01
01
05
00
FF
08
00
00
FF
00
00
00
FF
06
00
00
FF
04
00
00
FF
00
00
00
FF
01
00
00
00
00
AC
00
00
00
10
00
92
92
22
00
02
00
00
00
08
AC
00
01
00
02
31
06
10
00
00
00
00
00
00
33
00
00
80
0F
01
01
D1
00
00
00
00
FF
08
00
00
00 00 80 00 00 40 72 00 6F
00 40 72 00 6F 77 80 04 00
FF
00
00
00
FF
06
00
00
FF
04
00
00
FF
00
00
00
FF
01
00
00
00
00
AC
00
10
10
10
00
4B
4B
20
00
D0
D0
EB
00
00
08
AC
00
31
06
10
00
00
00
33
00
01
01
D1
00
FF
08
00
00
FF
00
00
00
FF
06
00
00
FF
04
00
00
FF
00
00
00
FF
01
00
00
00
00
AC
00
10
10
10
00
4B
4B
1E
00
D0
D0
82
00
...1............
Y...............
Y...2........."y
................
..
[email protected]
[email protected]...
.......
...1..........K.
.]............K.
.]..3......... .
................
..
...1..........K.
.]............K.
.]..3...........
................
..
Column
Description
Line number
Displays the line number, which can range from 01 to 32.
Direction indicator
Displays the direction indicator for the line. One of the
following appears:
z > for transmitted frames
z < for received frames.
Frame type indicator
Displays the frame type indicator for the line. One of the
following appears:
z d for asynchronous links
z Blank for other frames or packets.
Data
If the data field byte count is disabled, it gets displayed as
If the data display is enabled
and only present in data packets, then the data byte count is
displayed as <ASCII STRING>.
ct: <# of bytes in data field>.
8-54
9B
9B
79
00
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: diag-tconn
diag-tconn
Description
This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for
each link. It displays all connections on AI232 in the same format as command diagconn on page 8-34, but it is not interactive.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
diag-tconn
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport diag-tconn
Parameters
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
Examples
This example displays active connections on AI232. This is a partial display. The rest
of the response follows the pattern below for the remaining connections.
[232] diag-tconn
TIDMUXsw#1
13:26:30 040900 Sev=F Base=032 Msg:
AI232 Complete Connections Dump:
1. PARENT2
3. TCP 172.16.31.45#5001
TID(s): SONEPLEX-NE3
15. TCP 192.168.31.15#5001
TID(s): NE4-DAYTON-OH
NE7-DAYTON-OH
[232]
<-----> 32.ASY.2.1
<-----> PARENT2.1
SONEPLEX-NE4
<-----> PARENT2.2
NE5-DAYTON-OH
NE6-DAYTON-OH
NE8-DAYTON-OH
NE9-DAYTON-OH
Note: The connection ID is the first number that appears for each connection. For
example, the connection ID for connection PARENT2 is 1.
8-55
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: dir
dir
Description
This command displays a list of files with associated times, dates, permissions, and
sizes.
Command Type
shell
Formats
dir [ -l ]
Parameters
-l
Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission,
time, date, and file size. The ls command with this option is the same as the
dir command.
Examples
This example displays all available files.
[232]dir
boot.ini
boot.img
232.img
log.txt
primary.cnf
[232]
This example displays all available files with permission, size, time, and date
information.
[232]dir -l
-rw-r--r--r--r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r-[232]
8-56
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
143
2175720
22061
4342
7092
Jun 1 22:52 boot.ini
Aug 15 09:54 boot.img
Jun 1 00:00 log.txt
Aug 15 08:21 core.txt
Jun 13 22:46 primary.cnf
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: exit
exit
Description
This command ends the current shell session and returns to the login prompt.
Command Type
shell
Formats
exit
Examples
This example displays an exit from the current shell session.
[232]exit
Writing Configuration ...
Goodbye.
Valid destinations are as follows:
AI
Enter destination name (or "EXIT" to logout):
>
8-57
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: head
head
Description
This command displays the first few lines of a file.
Command Type
shell
Formats
head [ -n lines ] file_name ...
Parameters
[ -n lines ]
Defines the number of lines to display. The default is 20.
file_name
Defines the name of the file to display.
Note: Several filenames can be entered with this command.
Examples
This example displays the first 30 lines of file core.txt.
[232] head -n 30 core.txt
Crash Code= 00000025
PC= 000e72d8
SP= 01ca2140
IMMR= ff000031
MSR= 00000002
GPR00= 00000025
GPR01= 00000001
GPR02= 0025c980
GPR03= 002295c4
GPR04= 00000025
GPR05= 002295e8
GPR06= 00000064
GPR07= 00000005
GPR08= 0effffff
GPR09= 002c0000
GPR10= 002c0000
GPR11= 0027a7d4
GPR12= 01ca20b8
GPR13= 01bf5738
GPR14= 01ca2128
GPR15= 00000001
GPR16= 0a000069
GPR17= 01ca2188
GPR18= 0000000a
GPR19= 00000055
GPR20= 00000063
GPR21= 01bf5738
GPR22= 01ca2110
GPR23= 0001cc08
GPR24= 00000001
GPR25= 00000001
GPR26= 01ca2110
GPR27= 00000055
GPR28= 00000069
GPR29= 00000002
GPR30= 01ca2198
GPR31= 00000005
CR= 22000000
SSR0= 000e72d8
SSR1= 00009002
LR= 000f4894
XER= 0000b020
CTR= 00000000
PVR= 00500000
PSOS1= 000346fc PSOS2= 01ca20a8
PSOS3= 0001cbb0
Stack dump:
Caller
01ca2140: 01ca 2180 000f 3c8c 7573 6167 653a 2025
000f3c8c
01ca2150: 7320 3c70 6173 7377 6f72 643e 0a00 0c00
01ca2160: 01ca 2180 000f 3c8c 0000 0001 0000 0000
01ca2170: 0000 0000 01f4 5274 0000 0007 0027 ab6c
01ca2180: 01ca 21f0 000e d294 01f4 5274 0000 0200
000ed294
01ca2190: 0000 0055 0000 000b 01d3 533c 01d3 5342
01ca21a0: 0000 01fc 0000 0004 0000 0001 0005 0374
[232]
8-58
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: help
help
Description
This command lists all available system commands or information for a specific
command.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
help [ command ]
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport help [ command ]
Parameters
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
command
Defines the name of the command for which specific information will be
displayed.
Examples
This example displays a list of all available commands.
[232]help
The following commands are available:
*ftplogin
diag-tconn
*telnetlogin
dir
alarm
exit
arp
head
break
help
creset
id
debug
ip
delete
link
diag-conn
log
diag-eth
logout
diag-info
ls
diag-line
menu
[232]
modmux
more
passwd
ping
pppstatus
profile
pvclist
reset
sholog
show
staeia
standalone
staslc
syncflash
tail
tcpoutconn
tftp
tftpboot
type
useradd
userdel
users
who
This example displays help information for command show.
[232]help show
Usage: show [perf | comments | conn | data | mem | tcp | tconn | pvc |
eth | ip | router | version | log | crash | inventory | ports]
[232]
8-59
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: id
id
Description
This command displays the current user name and profile.
Command Type
shell
Formats
id
Examples
This example displays the current user name and profile.
[232]id
Username: 'pubs'
Profile: 'supervisor'
[232]
8-60
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: ip
ip
Description
This command displays the following system settings:
z
IP address
z
Subnet mask
z
High IP address
z
Primary router IP address
z
Backup router IP address
Command Type
shell
Formats
ip
Examples
This example displays the configured IP address information.
[232]ip
IP Address
Subnet Mask
High IP Address
------------------------------------------------------010.040.057.012
255.255.000.000
010.040.057.012
Router IP Address
------------------------010.040.000.001 (Default)
No backup router
[232]
8-61
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: ip init
ip init
Note: This command is only valid when AI232 is in standalone mode.
Description
This command configures the following settings for AI232 in standalone mode:
z
IP address
z
Subnet mask
z
High IP address
z
Primary gateway address
z
Backup gateway address
z
IP address range
CAUTION: The following message appears when the “ip init” command is invoked
and no login ports are configured:
There are no login ports currently configured for this system. Please take
necessary precautions to prevent lockout.
Command Type
shell
Formats
ip init
Examples
This example displays the prompt that appears when ip init is entered. A prompt
appears for each configurable IP address item.
[232] ip init
Enter IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):
8-62
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: ip init
This example displays the configuration of all the IP settings available with this
command:
[232] ip init
Enter IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):172.16.2.39
Setting IP Address to 172.16.2.39
Enter Subnet Mask (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):255.255.000.000
Setting Subnet Mask to 255.255.000.000
Enter Router Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):172.16.000.1
Setting Router Address to 172.16.000.1
Enter Backup Router Address (default none):172.16.2.41
Setting Backup Router Address to 172.16.2.41
Enter IP Address Range (default 1):
Setting range to 1
[232]
8-63
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: link
link
Description
This command is used to:
z
Force a serial link to connect or disconnect
Note: When this command is used to disconnect a serial link, all calls are torn
down. The serial link does not come back online until command link
start is issued.
Important: If you are connected to the AI232 shell using a serial port, remember
not to disable that port or else loss of connectivity will result.
z
Restart a link, which is a stop followed by a start
z
Show a configuration summary for a link or range of links.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
link { link_range | * } { start | stop | restart }
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport link { link_range | * } { start | stop | restart }
Parameters
link_range
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.
Note: This parameter applies to any action the user is trying
perform (start, stop, restart, or show information).
8-64
*
Specifies all links.
start
Enables the serial links.
stop
Disables the serial links.
restart
Restarts the serial links.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: link
Examples
This example displays the starting of links 1 through 4 and 6.
[232]link 1-4,6 start
[232]
This example displays the stopping of links 6 and 8.
[232]link 6,8 stop
[232]
8-65
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: log
log
Description
This command turns the display of log messages on or off.
Command Type
shell
Formats
log { on | off }
Parameters
on
Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages on.
off
Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages off.
Examples
This example displays the current status of the log message display.
[232]log
Display of log messages is currently disabled.
[232]
This example displays the activation of the log message display.
[232]log on
Display of log messages is now enabled.
[232]
This example displays the deactivation of log message display.
[232] log off
Display of log messages is now disabled.
[232]
8-66
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: logout
logout
Description
This command closes a shell session.
Command Type
shell
Formats
logout
Examples
This example displays the closing of a shell session.
[232]logout
Writing Configuration ...
Goodbye.
** Disconnecting **
8-67
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: ls
ls
Description
This command displays a list of available files.
Command Type
shell
Formats
ls [ -l ]
Parameters
-l
Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission,
time, date, and size.
Note: Entering ls with this option is the same as entering dir.
Examples
This example displays all available files.
[232]ls
boot.ini
boot.img
log.txt
core.txt
primary.cnf
[232]
This example displays all available files with associated permission levels, times,
dates, and sizes.
[232]ls -l
-rw-r--r--r--r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r--rw-r--r-[232]
8-68
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
143
2175720
22061
4342
7092
Jun 1 22:52 boot.ini
Aug 15 10:05 boot.img
Jun 1 00:00 log.txt
Aug 15 08:21 core.txt
Jun 13 22:46 primary.cnf
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: menu
menu
Description
This command accesses the AI232 main menu system.
Command Type
shell
Formats
menu
Examples
This example displays the AI232
Main Menu.
AI232 Main Menu
+ Link Menu
+ Alias Menu
+ System Menu
+ Static Route Menu
....................................................................
:
:
: Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key. :
: Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue.
:
:..................................................................:
<F1> Help
<F4> Close
CAUTION: The following message appears in the shell when the user exits the main
menu and has the last login port disabled:
There are no login ports currently configured for this system. Please take
necessary precautions to prevent lockout.
This message is only seen when the system is running in standalone
mode.
8-69
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: modmux
modmux
Description
This command displays the status of links in the modem pool.
Command Type
shell
Formats
modmux
Examples
This example displays the status of links in the modem pool.
[232]modmux
Link
1:
3:
5:
6:
19:
24:
29:
30:
Current Status
Idle
Idle
Connected
Idle
Disabled
Connected
Idle
Disabled
Conn Up Time
Init String
0:06:13
ATDT 555-1212
0:13:09
AT\n|ATDT 555-1234
[232]
Column
Description
Link
Displays link numbers.
Current Status
Displays the statuses of links. The following values are
possible:
z Disabled indicates that the link has been disabled
by a user.
z Idle indicates that the link is waiting for a
connection to make an outgoing call.
z Connected indicates that the protocol connected to
the link and the modem made an outgoing call.
Conn Up Time
Displays the up time for the connection.
Note: This column is only displayed if the link state is
Connected.
8-70
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: modmux
Column
Description
Init String
Displays the phone number that was dialed.
Note: This column is only displayed if the link state is
Connected.
8-71
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: more
more
Description
This command prints the content of a file to the current shell session one page at a
time.
Note: You cannot use this command to view code image files or configuration files
(.img and .cnf extensions).
Command Type
shell
Formats
more filename
Examples
This example displays the contents of file log.txt one page at a time.
[232]more log.txt
00:00:17 060100 Sev=F Msg:
Starting 232 in CLC mode.
00:00:17 060100 Sev=F Msg:
Pre-release code
Version 32HPA920.000135 created on 2000-06-27 at 15:27:37
Product Version *AI 232 Version 9.20. This is PRE-RELEASE code.
00:00:19 060100 Sev=F Msg:
SNMP Research SNMP Agent Resident Module Version 12.3.0.3
Copyright 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 SNMP Research, Inc.
00:00:34 060100 Sev=F Msg:
232 initialization complete.
10:13:24 073100 Sev=F Msg:
Version 32HPA920.000135 created on 2000-06-27 at 15:27:37
Boot Loader Version 32B2L100.000015
10:14:22 073100 Sev=F Msg:
User ai has logged into the Destination Menu.
10:14:25 073100 Sev=F Msg:
User ai has entered the shell.
Press Space for more or q to quit:
8-72
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: panic
panic
Description
This command forces AI232 to crash dump and halt.
Command Type
winslc
Formats
winslc baseport panic
Parameters
baseport
Defines the AI232 baseport number.
8-73
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: passwd
passwd
Description
This command changes an existing user’s password.
Command Type
shell
Formats
passwd
Note: After the initial command is entered, AI232 prompts the user for
information needed to configure the new password.
Examples
This example displays the configuration of a new password for existing user pubs.
[232]passwd
Please enter the login name of the user
whose password is being changed.
pubs
Please enter the OLD password for user 'pubs'.
Please enter the NEW password.
Passwords are truncated at 10 characters.
Please retype NEW password.
Password successfully changed.
[232]
8-74
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: ping
ping
Description
This command sends an ICMP echo request to the specified IP address. If the IP
device responds to the echo request, a reply receipt message appears. If a reply is
not received within 5 seconds, a no reply message appears. This command can be
used to troubleshoot network level problems.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
ping ip_address
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport ping ip_address
Parameters
ip_address
Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal
format.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
Examples
This example displays what happens when host 172.16.30.110 replies to a ping.
[232] ping 172.16.30.110
Pinging host 172.16.30.110
ICMP Echo Reply:TTL 60
Host 172.16.30.110 replied to the ping
The TTL (time-to-live) is the number of jumps or hops the message is allowed to take.
This example displays what happens when no reply is received from host
172.16.30.114.
[232] ping 172.16.30.114
Pinging host 172.16.30.114
Host 172.16.30.114 didn't reply to the ping
8-75
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: pppstatus
pppstatus
Description
This command displays the status of all ModMux and asynchronous PPP-IPCP links.
If IPCP is running on the link (the link status is RUNNING), this command also displays
the local and remote IP addresses.
Command Type
shell
Formats
pppstatus
Examples
This example displays the status of all PPP-IPCP links.
[232] pppstatus
Link Phase
1: ESTABLISH
14: SERIALCONN
[232]
8-76
Local IP Addr.
N/A
N/A
Remote IP Addr.
N/A
N/A
Column
Description
Link
Displays the link number.
Phase
Displays the status of the link. Values are:
z INITIALIZE—Indicates the link is down.
z SERIALCONN—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The
link is waiting for the data carrier detect (DCD) signal or the
data set ready (DSR) signal to come up.
z ESTABLISH—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The
AI232 and the remote device are negotiating basic
information on how the connection will operate.
z AUTHENTICATE—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The
link is validating ID and password information with the remote
device.
z NETWORK—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The link
is negotiating the local and remote IP addresses.
z RUNNING—Indicates the link is up and connected. IPCP is
running on the link. The AI232 and the remote device can
transfer IP packets over the link.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: pppstatus
Column
Description
Local IP Addr.
Displays one of the following:
z The IP address of AI232 (if the link status is RUNNING)
z N/A (if the link status is INITIALIZE, SERIALCONN, ESTABLISH,
AUTHENTICATE, or NETWORK)
Remote IP Addr.
Displays one of the following:
z The IP address of the remote device (if the link status is
RUNNING)
z N/A (if the link status is INITIALIZE, SERIALCONN, ESTABLISH,
AUTHENTICATE, or NETWORK)
8-77
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: profile
profile
Description
This command allows a user account profile to be customized. The following six
system profiles are maintained:
z
Supervisor
z
Management
z
Status
z
Empty
z
Destination menu
z
Connect
Profile names are limited to 19 characters. Only 20 user configurable profiles are
allowed to be configured at the same time.
Command Type
shell
Formats
profile -n
profile -l profile_name
profile -c existing_profile new_profile
profile -a profile_name [ commands [ -w ] ] ...
profile -d profile_name [ commands ] ...
profile -remove [ profile_name ]
Parameters
8-78
-n
Lists all user profile names.
-l
Lists all commands associated with a specific user profile.
profile_name
Defines the name of a user profile.
-c
Creates a new profile from an existing user profile.
existing_profile
Specifies the name of an existing user profile.
new_profile
Defines the name of a new user profile.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: profile
-a
Adds commands to a profile and optionally adds write
permission.
command
Defines the name of a command to associate with a user
profile.
-w
Adds write permission for a command that otherwise would
not have write permission.
-d
Deletes commands from a user profile.
-remove
Removes a user profile.
Examples
This example displays each of the profile parameter options with associated
functionality.
[232]profile
Usage: profile -n
to list profile names
: profile -l <profile name>
to list all commands associated with a given profile
: profile -c <existing profile name> <new profile name>
to create a new profile from an existing profile
: profile -a <profile name> [commands [-w]]...
to add commands to a profile and possibly add write permission
: profile -d <profile name> [commands]...
to delete commands from a profile
: profile -remove <profile name>
to completely remove a profile
[232]
8-79
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: pvclist
pvclist
Description
This command lists the PVCs in the system and displays their current state. If there
are many PVCs in the system, this command redirects its output to a file named
pvc.lst for easier viewing.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
pvclist [ link_range | * ]
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport pvclist [ link_range ]
Parameters
link_range
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.
*
Specifies all links.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
Examples
This example displays PVC information for link 1.
[232] pvclist 1
[PVC list]
+asy.1.1
passive
[232]
8-80
ASD: state=idle
muxid=0
fd=107
flags=0041
Column
Description
First column
Displays the PVC protocol type, link number, and LCN (logical
channel number).
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: pvclist
Column
Description
Second column
Displays the timer type for the PVC. Possible values are:
z ct—Displays the connect timer if the PVC is active. The
number indicates the timer setting in seconds.
z it—Displays the inactivity timer if the PVC is a connect-onactivity PVC. The number indicates the timer setting in
seconds.
z Passive—Appears if the PVC is a passive type of PVC.
Third column
Defines the state of the PVC. Possible values are:
z idle—Indicates the PVC is ready to connect.
z dataxfer—Indicates the PVC is connected and able to pass
data.
z incon—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.
z attaching—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.
z not attached—Indicates that the PVC is not connected.
z detached—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.
If the display indicates one of the transition states, this should
only appear for a short period of time. If the state remains in this
condition, contact Technical Support.
Fourth column
Defines the MuxID, which is an internal number used by
developers to describe which data stream is used for the
connection.
Fifth column
Defines the file descriptor, which is an integer value used by
developers to describe which data stream is used for the
connection.
Sixth column
Defines the flag, which gives a code that indicates the purpose of
the data stream.
8-81
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: reset
reset
Description
This command resets AI232.
CAUTION: All call processing will stop and all connections will be lost during the
reboot process.
Command Type
shell
Formats
reset
Examples
This example displays the resetting of AI232.
[232] reset
Are you SURE you want to reset the system? (y/n) y
8-82
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: router
router
Description
This command sets a default router in Menu 4.18 of the AI198 menu system. AI232
uses the default router when a static route has not been specified.
Note: This address can also be set in Menu 4.2.14 of the AI198 menu system. If the
address is entered in both menus, Menu 4.18 takes precedence.
Command Type
winslc
Formats
router ip_address
Parameters
ip_address
Defines the IP address of the default router.
Examples
This example displays a router address of 172.016.000.001 defined in Menu 4.18 of the
AI198 Menu System. This command can only be used in Menu 4.18.
>1 router 172.016.000.001
Menu 4.18 pg 1
01 router 172.016.000.001
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16 Previous page [,page]
17 Next page
18 Insert line
19 Delete line
20 Retain these changes for saving
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
8-83
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: router
Usage Notes
The router address takes effect after AI232 is booted. After booting, the address no
longer appears in Menu 4.18. However, the address is stored on the AI198 and can
be viewed or changed in Menu 4.2.14.
Note: View the router IP address with command winslc baseport show router.
8-84
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: selcnf
selcnf
Note: This command is only available for AI232 in standalone mode.
Description
This command has two forms: One allows for the recovery of an overwritten runtime
configuration file and the other allows for the deletion of the specified configuration
file. Any configuration file (with a .cnf extension) can be used for system boot up. The
configuration file is written to boot.ini.
Command Type
shell
Formats
selcnf -r
selcnf -d config_file
Parameters
-r
Specifies the option that recovers the current overwritten run-time
configuration file.
-d
Specifies the option that deletes a configuration file.
config_file
Defines a configuration file for deletion; it must end with a .cnf
extension.
Examples
This example displays the available options for command selcnf.
[232]selcnf
usage: selcnf -r
selcnf [-d] <config_file>
Selects the specified config file for current configuration.
Options:
-r
Recovers the current over-written run-time config file
-d
Deletes the specified configuration file
[232]
8-85
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: sholog
sholog
Description
This command displays the contents of the log file. The last 32,000 characters of log
messages that were sent to the log port are displayed.
Note: This command has the same functionality as command show log.
Command Type
shell
Formats
sholog -p
Parameters
-p
Displays the content of the file one page at a time.
Note: This option is not available with command show log.
Examples
This example displays the contents of an AI232 log file one page at a time.
[232]sholog -p
:26 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) DISCONNECT -> INITIALIZE
09:01:26 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) INITIALIZE -> SERIALCONN
09:01:27 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) SERIALCONN -> ESTABLISH
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) ESTABLISH -> DEAD
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) DEAD -> DISCONNECT
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) DISCONNECT -> INITIALIZE
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) INITIALIZE -> SERIALCONN
09:01:58 072304 Sev=F Msg:
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) SERIALCONN -> ESTABLISH
Press Space for more or q to quit:
8-86
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: show
show
Description
This command displays various types of information for AI232.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
show [ perf [ link_range | * ] | comments | conn | data [ link_range
| * ] | mem | tcp | tconn | pvc | eth | ip | router | version | log |
crash | inventory | ports [ link_range | * ] ]
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport show [ perf [ link_range | * ] | comments | conn |
data [ link_range | * ] | mem | tcp | tconn | pvc | eth | ip | router
| version | log | crash | inventory | ports [ link_range | * ] ]
Parameters
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
perf
Displays serial link performance.
link_range
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.
*
Specifies all links.
comments
Displays comments.
conn
Displays all active connections.
data
Displays link data.
mem
Displays memory allocation.
tcp
Displays TCP information (Ethernet retry packet, keep-alive tries,
dropped SNMP requests).
tconn
Displays complete connections.
pvc
Displays pvc connections.
eth
Displays Ethernet information.
8-87
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: show
ip
Displays the IP address, subnet mask, and high IP address.
router
Displays the default and backup gateway IP address.
version
Displays the version number of AI232.
date
Displays the date and time.
log
Displays the contents of the log file, same as command sholog.
crash
Displays crash dump information.
inventory
Displays the serial number, product name, and manufacture date.
ports
Displays the link number, link type, and description for all available
ports or for a specified range of ports.
Examples
This example displays the AI232 version number.
[232]show version
Version 32HPA950.000009 created on 2004-05-04 at 08:43:02
Boot Loader Version 32B2L105.000044
[232]
This example displays the serial link performance for links 2-5.
[232]show perf 2-5
Performance for last 60 seconds:
Intrf Type Input Chars/sec
Output Chars/sec
2
ASY
0
0
3
ASY
0
0
4
ASY
0
0
5
ASY
0
0
Intrf Type Input Chars/sec
Output Chars/sec
[232]
This example displays the link numbers, link types, and descriptions for ports 21-23.
[232]show ports 21-23
Link
21:
22:
23:
Type
ASY
ASY
ASY
[232]
8-88
Description
Async link 21
Async link 22
Async link 23
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: staeia
staeia
Description
This command displays the status of the EIA leads.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
staeia { link_range | * }
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport staeia { link_range | * }
Parameters
link_range
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.
*
Specifies all links.
baseport
Defines the baseport of AI232.
Examples
This example displays the status of the EIA leads for links
1
to 5.
[232] staeia 1-5
Link Type Status
1: ASY
2: ASY
3: ASY
4: ASY
5: ASY
[232]
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
DSR
IN
DCD
CTS
-
-
-
OUT
DTR RTS
+
+
+
+
+
+
Column
Description
DSR
DSR is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that
the lead is negated.
8-89
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: staeia
8-90
Column
Description
DCD
DCD is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that
the lead is negated.
CTS
CTS is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that
the lead is negated.
DTR
DTR is an outgoing EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that
the lead is negated.
RTS
RTS is an outgoing EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that
the lead is negated.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: standalone
standalone
Description
This command enables or disables standalone mode. For more information about the
difference between standalone mode and switch mode, refer to Appendix B:
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode.
Command Type
shell
Formats
standalone { true | false }
Parameters
true
Puts AI232 in standalone mode.
false
Takes AI232 out of standalone mode.
Examples
This example displays the current standalone mode status.
[232]standalone
Currently forced standalone mode is OFF.
Currently running in switch mode.
[232]
This example displays the configuration of standalone mode for AI232.
[232]standalone true
[232]
8-91
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: staslc
staslc
Description
This command displays the status of the links and the DP232 cable.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
staslc { link_range | * }
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport staslc { link_range | * }
Parameters
8-92
link_range
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.
*
Specifies all links.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: staslc
Examples
This example displays the link and cable status information for links 1 to 5.
[232]staslc 1-5
Link
Status Appl. DTR RTS CTS DSR DCD Format
Parity Frame Overun Underun
1:
Idle Login
+
+
9600,8,n,1
0
0
0
0
2: Disabled Login
?
?
?
?
?
9600,8,n,1
0
0
0
0
3:
-MMUX
?
?
?
?
? 19200
0
0
0
0
4: Disabled Login
?
?
?
?
?
9600,8,n,1
0
0
0
0
5: Disabled Login
?
?
?
?
?
9600,8,n,1
0
0
0
DP232 Cable Status: Ports 1-8
Connected
Ports 9-16 Not Connected
Ports 17-24 Not Connected
Ports 25-32 Not Connected
0
[232]
Note: Not all links are displayed here. Entering the command with no additional
parameters would show all 32 links.
Column
Description
Link
Displays the number of the link.
Status
Displays the link status as dataxfer (data is being transfered),
idle, or disabled.
Appl.
Displays the application specified for the link (Alias, Login, or
Destination).
DTR RTS CTS DSR DCD
Displays the status of the control signals. (+ means the signal
is asserted and - means the signal is negated.)
Format
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity (none, odd,
or even), and number of stop bits specified for the link.
Parity
Displays the number of parity errors.
Frame
Displays the number of framing errors.
Overun
Displays the number of overrun errors.
Underun
Displays the number of underrun errors.
8-93
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: syncflash
syncflash
Note: This command is only available when AI232 is in standalone mode.
Description
This command synchronizes the AI232 configuration with the configuration
information stored on AI198. Enabling this feature ensures that if AI232 is placed in
standalone mode, it will operate as it did in switch mode.
Command Type
shell
Formats
syncflash { true | false }
Parameters
true
Enables the update configuration functionality.
false
Disables the update configuration functionality.
Note: When running in standalone mode, AI232 always writes to its file system when
configuration changes are made. When running in switch mode, the running
configuration on AI232 is always kept current with AI198's configuration.
Examples
This example displays the AI232 configuration being synchronized with the
configuration information stored on AI198.
[232]syncflash true
[232]
8-94
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs info
tacacs info
Description
This command identifies how the current shell session was authenticated. If the
current session was authenticated by a TACACS+ server, it will display the IP address
of the server. If a TACACS+ server could not be contacted and fallback is enabled, it
will display Fallback to local. If TACACS+ authentication was disabled, it will display
Local.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs info
Examples
This example displays the TACACS+ authentication information as 192.168.001.089.
[232] tacacs info
Current session authenticated by: 192.168.001.089
[232]
8-95
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server
tacacs server
Description
This command enables, disables, or removes the configuration for specified
TACACS+ servers.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs server { server_range | * } { disable | enable | default }
Parameters
server_range
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. The server
number represents a server’s priority level. AI232 attempts to
contact all servers in the range starting with the lowest numbered
ones. If the connection to server #1 fails, AI232 will attempt to
contact server #2, and so on. Valid values are 1 to 9. Individual
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For
example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and 6.
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.
disable
Disables the TACACS+ server or range of TACACS+ servers.
enable
Enables the TACACS+ server or range of TACACS+ servers.
default
Disables all servers in the range and sets all configuration values
to their defaults.
Command Defaults
Disabled
Examples
This example displays the enabling of servers 1, 4 and 7.
[232] tacacs server 1,4,7 enable
[232]
8-96
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server ip
tacacs server ip
Description
This command configures an IP address for specified TACACS+ servers.
Note: AI232 does not prevent users from configuring multiple server entries with the
same IP address.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs server ip { server_range | * } { ip_address }
Parameters
server_range
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and
6.
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.
ip_address
Defines the server IP address.
Command Defaults
0.0.0.0
Examples
This example displays the configuration of IP address 12.56.120.4 for TACACS+
servers 3.
[232] tacacs server ip 3 12.56.120.4
[232]
8-97
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server phase
tacacs server phase
Description
This command configures the AAA phases that are allowed for specified TACACS+
servers.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs server phase { server_range | * } { disable | enable }
{ account | all | authen | author }
Parameters
server_range
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and
6.
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.
disable
Disables the specified AAA phases for the specified TACACS+
servers.
enable
Enables the specified AAA phases for the specified TACACS+
servers.
account
Enables or disables the accounting phase for the specified
TACACS+ servers.
all
Enables or disables all AAA phases for the specified TACACS+
servers.
authen
Enables or disables the authentication phase for the specified
TACACS+ servers.
author
Enables or disables the authorization phase for the specified
TACACS+ servers.
Command Defaults
All phases
8-98
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server phase
Examples
This example displays the disabling of the accounting phase for servers 1 to 5 and 8.
[232] tacacs server phase 1-5,8 disable account
[232]
8-99
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server port
tacacs server port
Description
This command configures the TCP port number for specified TACACS+ servers.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs server port { server_range | * } { port_number }
Parameters
server_range
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and
6.
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.
port_number
Defines the TCP port number for the TACACS+ servers. Valid
values are 1 through 65535.
Command Defaults
TCP port 49
Examples
This example displays the configuration of TCP port number 32500 for TACACS+
servers 7 to 9.
[232] tacacs server port 7-9 32500
[232]
8-100
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server secret
tacacs server secret
Description
This command configures the TACACS+ shared secret, which is similar to a
password, for specified TACACS+ servers.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs server secret { server_range | * } { shared_secret }
Parameters
server_range
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and
6.
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.
shared_secret
Defines the TACACS+ shared secret for the server or server
range. The maximum length of the shared secret is 24
characters.
Command Defaults
No secret configured
Examples
This example displays the configuration of shared secret newguy for TACACS+ server
8.
[232] tacacs server secret 8 newguy
[232]
8-101
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server summary
tacacs server summary
Description
This command displays a summary of TACACS+ server configuration settings for
specified servers.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs server summary [ server_range | * ]
Parameters
server_range
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and
6.
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.
Examples
This example displays all configured TACACS+ servers and server settings.
[232] tacacs server summary
Server
-----+ 1
- 2
- 3
+ 4
- 5
- 6
+ 7
- 8
- 9
IP Address
--------------012.056.120.004
012.056.120.004
012.056.120.004
012.012.012.012
012.012.012.012
012.012.012.012
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
Port Secret
----- -----------------------49
49
49
49
49
49
32500
32500
newguy
32500
Phases
--------------------Authen Author
Authen Author
Authen Author
Authen Author
Authen Author
Authen Author Account
Authen Author Account
Authen Author
Authen Author Account
[232]
8-102
Display Item
Description
Server
Displays the server numbers. The +/- signs indicate if the
associated servers are enabled (+) or disabled (-).
IP Address
Displays the configured TACACS+ IP addresses for the specified
TACACS+ servers.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs server summary
Display Item
Description
Port
Displays the configured TACACS+ port numbers for the specified
TACACS+ servers.
Secret
Displays the TACACS+ shared secrets (passwords) for specified
TACACS+ servers.
Phases
Displays the AAA phases that are allowed for specified TACACS+
servers.
8-103
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs sholog
tacacs sholog
Description
This command displays the contents of the TACACS+ debug log file. The TACACS+
debug log file records all connection attempts to TACACS+ servers. The following
information is displayed for each connection attempt:
z
A record of the timestamp
z
The IP address of TACACS+ server
z
The AAA phase
z
The success or failure status associated with each connection.
Note: The TACACS+ debug log file is only populated when TACACS+ debugging is
enabled using command debug tacacs on.
Format
tacacs sholog [ -p ]
Parameters
-p
Displays the contents of the debug log file one page at a time.
Examples
This example displays a TACACS+ debug log file.
[232] tacacs sholog
[02:26:32
[02:26:32
[02:26:32
[02:26:32
8-104
030406]
030406]
030406]
030406]
192.168.001.074
192.168.001.089
192.168.001.074
192.168.001.089
AUTHEN
AUTHEN
AUTHOR
AUTHOR
FAIL
SUCCESS
FAIL
SUCCESS
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs stats
tacacs stats
Description
This command displays or clears TACACS+ specific counters and statistics.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tacacs stats [ clear ]
Parameters
clear
Clears all TACACS+ specific counters and statistics.
Examples
This example displays all TACACS+ specific counters and statistics.
TACACS+ Statistics
------------------------Connect Attempts:
Connect Failures:
0
0
Wrong
Wrong
Wrong
Wrong
0
0
0
0
Header Type:
Header Sequence Number:
Header Session ID:
Body Length:
Write Errors:
Read Errors:
Short Header Received:
Short Body Received:
0
0
0
0
Timed-out waiting for response:
0
[232]
Display Item
Description
Connect Attempts
Displays the number of attempts that were made to connect to
the TACACS+ server.
Connect Failures
Displays the number of failed connection attempts that were
made to the TACACS+ server.
Wrong Header Type
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+
server that had an invalid type.
8-105
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tacacs stats
8-106
Display Item
Description
Wrong Header
Sequence Number
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+
server that had a sequence number that was out of order.
Wrong Header
Session ID
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+
server that had an invalid session ID.
Wrong Body Length
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+
server that had a body length attribute that did not match the
actual length of body received.
Write Errors
Displays the number of errors that occurred when AI232
attempted to send a packet to the TACACS+ server.
Read Errors
Displays the number of errors that occurred when AI232
attempted to read a packet from the TACACS+ server.
Short Header
Received
Displays the number of incomplete headers that were received
when AI232 attempted to read a packet from the TACACS+
server.
Short Body
Received
Displays the number of packets with incomplete bodies that
were received when AI232 attempted to read them from the
TACACS+ server.
Timed-out waiting
for response
Displays the number of times AI232 timed out while waiting for
a response from the TACACS+ server. For information about
configuring the time out value, refer to command aaa timeout
on page 8-19.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tail
tail
Description
This command displays the last few lines of a file.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tail [ -n lines ] file_name ...
Note: More than one file name can be specified in this command.
Parameters
-n
Specifies that a line number value will be entered.
lines
Defines the number of lines to display. The default is 20.
file_name
Defines the name of the file to display.
Examples
This example displays the last 20 lines of file log.txt.
[232]tail -n 20 log.txt
Configuration has changed
13:39:08 050304 Sev=F Msg:
Unknown WINSLC command TRACE
14:07:52 050304 Sev=F Msg:
Valid commands are:
ARP
BREAK
IP
LINK
ROUTER
SHOW
TELNET
UPDATE
CRESET
PANIC
STAEIA
XON-INTERVAL
DIAG-TCONN
PING
STASLC
HELP
PVCLIST
TCPOUTCONN
14:21:01 050304 Sev=F Msg:
Valid commands are:
ARP
BREAK
IP
LINK
ROUTER
SHOW
TELNET
UPDATE
CRESET
PANIC
STAEIA
XON-INTERVAL
DIAG-TCONN
PING
STASLC
HELP
PVCLIST
TCPOUTCONN
14:31:19 050304 Sev=F Msg:
The WINSLC command 'TELNET 75' must be executed from
the CLC's menu 4.18 for this SLC.
[232]
8-107
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tcpoutconn
tcpoutconn
Description
This command controls how long outgoing TCP connections wait for a connection to
be established before failing.
Command Type
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
tcpoutconn [ timeout ]
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport tcpoutconn [ timeout ]
Parameters
timeout
Defines the length of the timeout. The range is 2 to 360 seconds. The
default is 75.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
Note: In standalone mode, resetting AI232 resets the timeout to the default of 75.
Examples
This example displays the configuration of the TCP outgoing connection timer to 30
seconds.
[232]tcpoutconn 30
TCP Outgoing Connection Timer Value: 30
[232]
8-108
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: telnet
telnet
Description
This command changes the port number used to receive incoming telnet connections
from default port 23.
Important: This command must be executed from CLC Menu 4.18 in the AI198
menu system. When AI232 is booted, Menu 4.18 entries are no longer
visible. To see the current telnet port number after AI232 is booted, use
the winslc telnet command.
Command Type
winslc
Formats
telnet port_number
Parameters
port_number
Defines the port number used to receive incoming telnet
connections. Valid values are from 1 to 65534. The default is 23.
Examples
This example changes the telnet port to port 68.
>1 telnet 68
Menu 4.18 pg 1
01 telnet 68
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
16 Previous page [,page]
17 Next page
18 Insert line
19 Delete line
20 Retain these changes for saving
21 Exit this menu with no changes
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key
>
8-109
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tftp
tftp
Note: This command is only available when AI232 is in standalone mode.
Description
This command downloads a file from the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server
to AI232 or uploads a file to the TFTP server from AI232.
The following rules apply when uploading or downloading a file:
z
File names must contain an extension of .ini, .img, .zmg, .cnf, or .txt.
z
Configuration files can be downloaded directly to file primary.cnf or to another .cnf
file.
z
The only .txt file allowed is banner.txt and the only .ini file allowed is boot.ini.
z
AI232 must be updated in order to run a downloaded image file.
z
Any .img filename is acceptable except boot.img, which is reserved, and
primary_devel.img, which is the primary image.
z
All .zmg files must be written to a destination file with a .img extension. If no
destination file name is given, the name will default to the source file name with a
.img extension.
z
The source and destination file names must have the same extension (excluding
.zmg files, which use a .img extension).
Command Type
shell
Formats
tftp { get | put } [ address ] [ source_filename ] [ dest_filename ]
Parameters
get
Downloads a file from the TFTP server.
put
Uploads a file to the TFTP server.
address
Defines the IP address of the TFTP server to which the file
download or upload will occur.
source_filename
Defines the file to download from or upload to the TFTP server.
Note: The source file name cannot contain spaces or special
characters.
8-110
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tftp
dest_filename
Defines the name of the source file after it has been
downloaded from or uploaded to the server. If no destination
file name is specified, the file will have the same name as the
source file.
Note: The destination file name cannot contain spaces or
special characters.
Examples
This example displays the upload of file primary.cnf to file secondary.cnf on TFTP
server 10.34.6.13.
[232] tftp put 10.34.6.13 primary.cnf secondary.cnf
File Uploaded successfully.
[232]
This example displays the download of file secondary.cnf to file primary.cnf from TFTP
server 10.34.6.13.
[232] tftp get 10.34.6.13 secondary.cnf primary.cnf
Attempting to Download the file secondary.cnf ...
File Downloaded successfully.
[232]
8-111
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tftpboot
tftpboot
Description
This command displays the BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts attempts to contact the
BOOTP server. The AI232 card attempts to contact a BOOTP server if certain
conditions are met. These conditions are:
z
The card is in standalone mode.
AND
z
The card does not have an IP address set or no BOOT.INI file exists.
Attempts to contact the BOOTP server continue until a valid reply is received or until
the IP address gets set by the user in another manner, such as with an “ip init” shell
command.
Note: If the conditions are initially met, then the card will not attempt to contact the
BOOTP server.
When AI232 receives the necessary information from the BOOTP server, it attempts
to retrieve a configuration file from the TFTP server. The TFTP server information is
contained in the response from the BOOTP server.
Command Type
shell
Formats
tftpboot
Examples
This example displays the result of a card booting without a BOOTP/TFTP session.
[232]tftpboot
Usage: tftpboot [abort]
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.
BOOTP/TFTP did not run this session.
[232]
8-112
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: tftpboot
This example displays the result of a card booting when no BOOTP or TFTP server is
on the net.
[232] tftpboot
Usage: tftpboot [abort]
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.
Waiting for a response from the BOOTP server.
[232] tftpboot abort
BOOTP/TFTP retry attempts will be aborted.
[232]
This example displays the result of a boot when the BOOTP server is on the net but
the TFTP server is not available:
[232] tftpboot
Usage: tftpboot [abort]
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.
Waiting for a response from the TFTP server.
BOOTP Response:
IP Address: 10.48.60.11
TFTP Server: 10.48.60.1
TFTP File: 296v950b002.cnf
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Router: 10.48.0.1
[232]
This example displays the result of a reboot with a successful BOOTP/TFTP session:
[232]tftpboot
Usage: tftpboot [abort]
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.
BOOTP/TFTP is finished.
[232]
8-113
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: timezone
timezone
Note: This command is only available when AI232 is in standalone mode.
Description
This command displays or changes the time zone or adjusts the time to reflect
daylight savings.
Command Type
shell
Formats
timezone [ -dston | -dstoff ] [ { + | - } hh:mm ]
Parameters
-dston
Enables daylight savings time for AI232.
-dstoff
Disables daylight savings time for AI232.
hh
Defines the number of hours from UTC (Universal Coordinated Time or
Greenwich Mean Time).
mm
Defines the number of minutes from UTC (Universal Coordinated Time
or Greenwich Mean Time).
+
Specifies that the value is east of UTC.
-
Specifies that the value is west of UTC.
Note: For +/-, enter the direction (+ = east) (- = west) of Universal Coordinated Time
(UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time.
The time entered here is the number of hours from UTC. For example, if the
desired location is in the Eastern Standard Time (EST) zone, enter -05:00 in
this field. This indicates a time 5 hours behind UTC.
Examples
This example displays the current daylight savings time setting.
[232]timezone
Daylight saving is disabled on this system
Current time zone: +00:00
[232]
8-114
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: timezone
This example displays the enabling of daylight savings time and the setting of the
timezone to -5:00.
[232]timezone -dston
Daylight saving is enabled on this system
Current time zone: +00:00
[232]timezone -05:00
Daylight saving is enabled on this system
Current time zone: -05:00
[232]
8-115
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: type
type
Description
This command displays the text of any file other than a code image or configuration
file.
Note: This command has the same functionality as command cat.
Command Types
shell
Formats
type [ -p ] filename
Parameters
-p
Displays text from the file one page at a time.
filename
Defines the file for which you want to view the contents.
Examples
This example displays the first page of contents for file log.txt.
[232]type -p log.txt
14:48:28 042904 Sev=F Msg:
User 'pubs' has deleted the log file.
16:30:58 042904 Sev=0 Msg:
Configuration has changed
16:30:58 042904 Sev=F Msg:
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2088 has exited the shell.
16:31:00 042904 Sev=F Msg:
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2088 has logged out of the Destination Menu.
09:34:57 043004 Sev=F Msg:
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has logged into the Destination Menu.
09:34:59 043004 Sev=F Msg:
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has entered the shell.
13:12:38 043004 Sev=0 Msg:
Configuration has changed
13:12:38 043004 Sev=F Msg:
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has exited the shell.
13:31:14 043004 Sev=F Msg:
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has entered the shell.
Press Space for more or q to quit:
8-116
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: update
update
Description
This command displays information about the image and configuration files. When
entered with arguments, this command updates AI232 software. Update the software
by copying a new image or configuration file to a destination file.
Command Types
shell and winslc
Formats
For the shell command:
update src_file dest_file
For the winslc command:
winslc baseport update src_file dest_file
Parameters
src_file
Defines the source file to copy.
dest_file
Defines the file where the source file is to be stored.
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
Note: The src_file and the dest_file must both have a file extension of either .cnf
or .img.
Examples
This example displays the update of source image file 232.img to destination image file
boot.img.
[232]update 232.img boot.img
[232]
8-117
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: uptime
uptime
Description
This command displays the current time and the amount of time AI232 has been
running since it was last booted.
Command Type
shell
Formats
uptime
Examples
This example displays the current time and the amount of time AI232 has been
running since it was last booted.
[232]uptime
4:22pm up 0 days, 0:07:44
(uptime rolls over every 497 days, 2:27:52)
[232]
8-118
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: useradd
useradd
Description
This command adds a username and password. When the user first logs into AI232,
the login name and password are both ai by default. Five grace logins are available
before a username and password must be configured. A total of ten users can be
added to the database.
Command Type
shell
Formats
useradd [ -profile_name ] [ username ]
Parameters
profile_name
Assigns a permission to a username. Table 8-3 describes the
permissions. The default permission is supervisor.
username
Defines the login name for a user (up to 8 characters). After
entering a username, a prompt appears that asks for a password
(up to 10 characters).
Table 8-3 Description of Permissions
profile_name
Permission
supervisor
Specifies a user who can execute all commands on the system. At
least one supervisor permission must be configured. The system
will not allow the deletion of the only supervisor user. The default
permission is supervisor.
mgmt
Specifies a user who can execute all commands except for
useradd.
8-119
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: useradd
Table 8-3 Description of Permissions (Continued)
profile_name
Permission
status
Specifies a user who can only execute the following commands:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
creset
debug
diag-conn
diag-info
diag-eth
diag-tconn
help
ip
menu
ping
pvclist
show
staeia
staslc
dest
Specifies a user who can login into AI232 and access the
destination menu. The user cannot connect to destination ai to
retrieve status or to change the configuration.
connect
Specifies a user who is automatically connected to a specific
destination at login. The destination is specified when the
permission is assigned.
Examples
This example displays the addition of user brian with profile mgmt to the user database.
The system prompts the user for the password after the username and profile are
entered.
[232]useradd -mgmt brian
Adding user of type 'mgmt'
Please enter a password.
Passwords are truncated at 10 characters.
Please retype the password.
User "brian" added successfully.
[232]
8-120
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: userdel
userdel
Description
This command deletes a username and password from the database.
Command Type
shell
Formats
userdel
Examples
This example displays the deletion of user brian from the database. After the
command is initially entered, prompts appear that tell the user what information needs
to be entered.
[232] userdel
Please enter the login name of the user to DELETE.
newguy
Delete user "newguy"? (y/n) y
User "newguy" deleted successfully.
[232]
8-121
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: users
users
Description
This command displays currently configured AI232 users with the associated profile
names and destinations.
Command Types
shell
Formats
user
Examples
This example displays all currently configured AI232 users with associated profile
names and destinations. In this case, pubs is the only configured user.
[232] users
User Name
Profile Name
Destination
----------------------------------------------"pubs"
supervisor
[232]
8-122
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: who
who
Description
This command displays the users currently logged into AI232. It displays the user
name, time of login, user ID, the source of the connection, and command currently
being used by each user. The destination is shown only if the user has connected to
an alias with the destination menu.
Important: Do not use the ID displayed with this command to break a connection.
Command Type
shell
Formats
who
Examples
This example displays all the users currently logged in to the AI232. In this case, pubs
is the only logged in user.
[232] who
User
Login Time
ID From
Command (-> Destination)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------"pubs"
Jul 28 02:42
149 10.40.5.12#1241
who
[232]
8-123
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Commands: xon-interval
xon-interval
Description
This command adjusts the amount of time between consecutive Xons. If inbound flow
control is enabled on an asynchronous link, AI232 transmits Xons at regular intervals.
Command Type
winslc
Formats
winslc baseport xon-interval link seconds
Parameters
baseport
Defines the baseport number for AI232.
link
Defines the link number to adjust the XON interval. Valid values are 1 to
32.
seconds
Defines the number of seconds the link waits between sending
consecutive XONs. The default interval is 15 seconds. The valid range
is 1 to 120 seconds.
Examples
This example displays the configuration of the XON transmit interval to 45
link 3.
NODE-XXX AISwitch Shell Connection
>winslc 16 xon-interval 3 45
NODE-XXX AISwitch Shell Connection
8-124
14
14
seconds
on
A
AI232 Crash Codes
This appendix provides information about AI232 crash codes.
Guide to this Appendix
Crash Codes
Kentrox Technical Support
A-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Crash Codes: Crash Codes
Crash Codes
Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an AIswitch
fault message. This message indicates that the system has detected a serious
hardware or software fault.
Common Crash Codes
These codes are common to all software (not just AI products). The first column of
Table A-1 displays the hexadecimal code for the error message. The second column
displays the decimal value for the same message. The third column provides a
description of the error message. Contact AI Technical Support to report any of the
following crash codes.
Table A-1 Common Crash Codes
A-2
Error Code
Hexadecimal
Error Code
Decimal
Description
0001
1
Specifies a bus error.
0002
2
Specifies an address error.
0003
3
Specifies an illegal instruction.
0004
4
Specifies a zero divide error.
0005
5
Specifies a check instruction trap.
0006
6
Specifies a TRAPV error.
0007
7
Specifies a privilege error.
0008
8
Specifies a trace trap.
0009
9
Specifies an unused exception vector.
09xx
>264
Specifies an illegal vector. xx is the vector number
(non-zero) used in place of the codes above to
ensure that the exact vector number is determined
if an exception occurs.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Crash Codes: Crash Codes
AI232 Crash Codes
Table A-2 displays crash codes that are specific to AI232. Contact AI Technical
Support to report any of the following crash codes.
Table A-2 AI232 Crash Codes
Error Code
Hexadecimal
Error Code
Decimal
Description
0020
32
Specifies a failure to free resource (streams).
0021
33
Specifies a failure to free memory (system).
0022
34
Specifies a failure of resource allocation (streams).
0023
35
Specifies a failure of memory allocation.
0024
36
Specifies a checksum error.
0025
37
Specifies that a panic message has been printed.
0026
38
Specifies an attempt to boot while up.
0027
39
This code is not used.
0028
40
Specifies that AI232 has been halted by Central
Switch command. This code is seen when you enter
command stpslc for a card.
0030
48
Specifies a crash in the shell.
0031
49
Specifies a crash in transport layer multiplexing.
0032
50
Specifies a crash in association daemon.
0033
51
Specifies a crash in bootp.
0034
52
Specifies a crash in X.25.
0035
53
Specifies a crash in an asynchronous driver.
0036
54
Specifies a crash in the PVC daemon.
0037
55
Specifies a crash in the config daemon.
0038
56
Specifies a generic stream error.
0039
57
Specifies a crash in the AEP or AEPN protocol
processing option.
003A
58
Specifies a crash in the pktmod or TL1mod protocol
processing option.
A-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Crash Codes: Crash Codes
Table A-2 AI232 Crash Codes (Continued)
Error Code
Hexadecimal
Error Code
Decimal
00AA
170
Specifies a serious memory error (unable to allocate
system memory).
00AC
172
Specifies that a serial communication controller is
not responding.
00AD
173
Specifies a software download. This is normal to
see when doing a software update to AI232.
Description
System Failure Crash Reports
Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an AIswitch
fault message. This message indicates that the system has detected a serious
hardware or software fault.
A message similar to the following appears:
SLC has CRASHED - registers to follow:
Crash Code= 000000ad
PC= 00000000
SP= 00000000
IMMR= 00000000
MSR= 00000000
GPR00= 00000000
GPR01= 00000000
GRP02= 00000000
GPR03= 00000000
GPR04= 00000000
GRP05= 00000000
GPR06= 00000000
GPR07= 00000000
GRP08= 00000000
GPR09= 00000000
GPR10= 00000000
GRP11= 00000000
GPR12= 00000000
GPR13= 00000000
GRP14= 00000000
GPR15= 00000000
GPR16= 00000000
GRP17= 00000000
GPR18= 00000000
GPR19= 00000000
GRP20= 00000000
GPR21= 00000000
GPR22= 00000000
GRP23= 00000000
GPR24= 00000000
GPR25= 00000000
GRP26= 00000000
GPR27= 00000000
GPR28= 00000000
GRP29= 00000000
GPR30= 00000000
GPR31= 00000000
CR= 00000000
SSR0= 00000000
SSR1= 00000000
LR= 00000000
XER= 00000000
CTR= 00000000
PVR= 00500000
PSOS1=00000000
PSOS2=00000000
PSOS3= 00000000
A-4
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Crash Codes: Kentrox Technical Support
Kentrox Technical Support
Some alarm conditions and crash codes reveal serious problems for which you
should contact Kentrox Technical Support. If one of these alarm conditions or crashes
should occur, record relevant information associated with the problem and contact
Kentrox Technical Support.
Phone:
Kentrox Technical Support
(866) 480-3571
Kentrox Operator (tollfree)
(800) 247-9482
Kentrox Operator
(international)
(614) 798-2000
Email:
Kentrox Technical
Support
[email protected]
When you send email to Kentrox, be sure to include your name, company name, and
telephone number.
A-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
AI232 Crash Codes: Kentrox Technical Support
A-6
B
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode
This appendix provides information about standalone and switch mode for AI232.
Guide to this Appendix
Standalone Mode
Switch Mode
B-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Standalone Mode
Standalone Mode
Standalone mode refers to the mode where AI232 stores its configuration locally (to
flash) or on a TFTP server. The CLC might be used as the TFTP server in some
cases. This lets the card operate as a self-contained unit. When operating in
standalone mode, AI232 has a local menu system that is used instead of the AI198
menu system for tasks such as alias and IP configuration. AI232 operates in
standalone mode when it is installed in the AI110 chassis.
The following characteristics apply when AI232 is operating in standalone mode:
z
The front panel Ethernet port is the default (rather than the IRB).
z
AI232 cards are not hot-swappable—the card configuration must be set up
manually.
z
AI232 has a unique system OID.
z
The AI232 local menu system has slightly different options than when the card is
running in switch mode.
Downloading Software for a Standalone AI232
To download software for AI232 in standalone mode:
1. Open a command prompt window.
2. At the command prompt, start the FTP utility:
ftp
3. At the FTP prompt, open AI232:
open ip_address
ip_address
Specifies the AI232 IP address.
The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password.
4. Put the FTP utility in binary mode:
binary
5. Transfer the software image to AI232:
put filepath/imagename.img
filepath
Defines the path to the software image file.
imagename
Defines the software image file name.
Note: Wait for a completion message after entering this command.
B-2
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Standalone Mode
6. Exit the FTP utility.
7. Login to the shell with a serial or Telnet connection.
8. Update the existing boot program image with the new software image file:
update imagename.img boot.img
imagename
Defines the software image file name.
9. When the update is complete, reboot AI232.
Configuring BOOTP/TFTP
The AI232 configuration can be automatically downloaded from a TFTP server when
the card is in standalone mode and has BOOTP information stored in AI198 Menu 10.
For more information about BOOTP configuration, refer to “Configuring the BOOTP
Table” in the AI198 Common Logic Controller System Manager/User’s Manual.
When AI232 starts, it determines if the following conditions are met before using
BOOTP to find IP address information:
z
AI232 is in standalone mode
z
The IP address is not set.
If both of these conditions are met, AI232 attempts to contact a BOOTP server until it
obtains valid IP address information or the IP address is set by a user with the
ip init shell command. When an IP address has been obtained either by BOOTP or
through the ip init command, AI232 will resume its boot process.
The following events occur when AI232 attempts to download a configuration file from
the TFTP server:
z
Once the IP address information has been correctly configured from the BOOTP
reply, AI232 will attempt to contact a TFTP server only if the TFTP server IP
address and configuration filename were received by the BOOTP reply.
z
AI232 will try to download the configuration file from the TFTP server once every
60 seconds for a maximum of 10 retries.
z
If no valid configuration file is downloaded from the TFTP server after 10 retries,
AI232 will remove the previously configured IP address information from the
BOOTP server and completely restart the BOOTP process.
z
If at any time the local configuration file stored on flash is changed by a user,
AI232 will stop attempting to contact the TFTP server.
z
If a valid configuration is successfully downloaded from the TFTP server, AI232
will update the current configuration with the downloaded file.
B-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode
Switch Mode
Switch mode refers to the mode where AI232 is managed by the CLC. When AI232 is
in switch mode, the AI198 menu system must be used to configure IP addresses,
aliases, IP static routes, and SNMP traps. AI232 must be located in the AI130 or
AI180 chassis to operate in switch mode.
The following characteristics apply when AI232 is operating in switch mode:
z
AI232 gets its configuration from the CLC at boot time (instead of locally or by
TFTP).
z
The CLC is used to route calls and maintain alias configuration information.
z
The IRB is the default port (rather than the front panel Ethernet port).
z
AI232 cards are hot-swappable—the card configuration does not have to be set
up manually.
Note: Switch mode may also be referred to as CLC mode.
Downloading Software for AI232 in Switch Mode
To download software for AI232 when it is in switch mode:
1. Open a command prompt window.
2. At the command prompt, start the FTP utility:
ftp
3. At the FTP prompt, open AI198:
open ip_address
ip_address
Specifies the AI198 IP address.
The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password.
4. Put the FTP utility in binary mode:
binary
5. Transfer the software image to AI198:
put filepath/imagename.img
filepath
Defines the path to the software image file.
imagename
Defines the software image file name.
Note: Wait for a completion message after entering this command.
B-4
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode
6. Exit the FTP utility.
7. Log in to AI198.
8. At the command prompt, update AI232 with the new software image:
winslc baseport update
baseport
Defines the baseport of AI232.
Note: You can watch the download process by entering CTRL+L.
9. Wait for the completion message.
B-5
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode
B-6
C
Commands for AI232 TACACS+
Server Enhancements
This appendix provides a list of commands that users need when configuring a TACACS+ server
to utilize AI232’s authorization enhancements.
Guide to this Appendix
AI232 Commands
AI232 Menu Aliases
FTP Sessions
C-1
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: AI232 Commands
AI232 Commands
Important: To authorize a command with no additional arguments, remember to
enter permit ^$ in the argument list.
The following AI232 commands can be included in an authorization set on the
TACACS+ server:
2401
aaa
ai
alarm
arp
break
cat
clear
crash
crc
creset
date
debug
del
delete
diag-conn
diag-eth
diag-info
diag-line
diag-tconn
dir
exit
head
help
memory
memtrack
menu
modmux
more
passwd
ping
pppstatus
profile
pvclist
queue
ip
link
log
logout
ls
reset
rm
selcnf
sholog
show
snmp
id
sonic
staeia
standalone
staslc
syncflash
tacacs
tail
task
tcpoutconn
tftp
tftpboot
timezone
type
update
uptime
useradd
userdel
users
who
The following keyword lets users access destinations:
dest
C-2
Provides authorization at the destination menu. Individual destination
names can be used as arguments. For example, {permit AI, permit
somedestination, permit EXIT}.
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: AI232 Menu Aliases
AI232 Menu Aliases
The following AI232 menu aliases can be included in an authorization set on the
TACACS+ server. Authorization occurs when level 1 menu items are traversed:
menu
Provides access to the menu.
menu_link
Provides read access to the link menu.
menu_link write
Provides write access to the link menu.
menu_alias
Provides read access to the alias menu.
menu_alias write
Provides write access to the alias menu.
menu_system
Provides read access to the system menu.
menu_system write
Provides write access to the system menu.
menu_route
Provides read access to the static route menu.
menu_route write
Provides write access to the static route menu.
Note: Keyword write is treated as an argument.
C-3
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide
Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: FTP Sessions
FTP Sessions
The following AI232 keywords apply to FTP access:
C-4
ftplogin
Provides FTP read access.
ftpwrite
Provides FTP write access.
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym
Meaning
ABR
Area Border Router
ACK
Acknowledgement (positive)
ACTA
Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments
AEP
Applied Innovation Encapsulation Protocol
AEPN
Applied Innovation Encapsulated Protocol with the Network option
AI
Applied Innovation Inc.
ALS
Address Lookup Server
AMI
Alternate Mask Inversion
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
AS
Autonomous System
ASBDR
Autonomous System Boundary Router
ASBR
Autonomous System Boundary Router
ASE
Autonomous System External
ASEX
Autonomous System External
ASP
Application Service Provider
BAM
Bistate Alarm Module
BCP
Bridging Control Protocol
BER
Bit Error Rate
BERT
Bit Error Rate Test
BGMP
Border Gateway Multicast Protocol
Acronyms-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
BGP
Border Gateway Protocol
BOC
Bell Operating Company
BPDU
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
C
Common
CAAML
Centralized Autonomous AI Message Logging
CALLA
Call Accepted Packet
CALLC
Call Connected Packet
CALLR
Call Request Packet
CCI
Command and Control Interface
CCITT
Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony
CD
Carrier Detect
CEV
Controlled Environment Vault
CHAP
Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol
CLC
Common Logic Controller
CLEC
Competitive Local Exchange Carrier
CLEI
Common Language Equipment Identifier
CLI
Command Line Interface
CLNP
Connectionless Network Protocol
CLRC
Clear Confirmation Packet
CLRI
Clear Indication Packet
CLRR
Clear Request Packet
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Acronyms-2
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
CRT
Cathode Ray Tube
CSU
Channel Service Unit
CTS
Clear to Send
CUD
Call User Data
DAD
Data Acquisition Device
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment or Data Communication Equipment
DCN
Data Communications Network
DD
Database Description
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DLC
Data Link Control
DLCI
Data Link Connection Identifier (Information)
DNS
Domain Name Service
DSR
Data Set Ready
DSU
Digital Service Unit
DSX
Digital System Cross-Connect
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
DVMRP
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EGP
External Gateway Protocol
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EM
Element Manager
EMI
Electro Magnetic Interference
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
Acronyms-3
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
ES
End System
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ES-IS
End System to Intermediate System
EST
Eastern Standard Time
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
FDM
Frequency Division Multiplexing
FDX
Full Duplex
FGND
Frame Ground
FIC
Faculty Interface Code
FOC
Fiber Optics Communications
FTAM
File Transfer, Access, and Management
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GRE
Generic Routing Encapsulation
GUI
Graphical User Interface
HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
I/O
Input/Output
ICALL
Incoming Call Packet
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol
ID
Identification
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IGMP
Internet Group Multicast Protocol
IGP
Interior Gateway Protocol
IPCP
IP Control Protocol
IPX
Internetwork Packet Exchange
Acronyms-4
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
IRB
Inter-repeater Bus
IS
Intermediate System
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
IS-IS
Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO
International Standards Organization
ISP
Internet Service Provider
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
IXE
IP Protocol over X.25 Encapsulation
JRE
Java Runtime Environment
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPB
Link Access Protocol - Balanced
LBO
Line Build Out
LCN
Logical Channel Number
LCP
Link Control Protocol
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LLC
Logical Link Control
LSA
Link State Advertisement
LSR
Link State Request
LSU
Link State Update
MAC
Media Access Control
MAN
Metropolitan Area Network
MBR
Master Boot Record
MCI
Master Communications Interface
MD
Mediation Device
MIB
Management Information Base
Acronyms-5
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
MMF
Multimode Fiber Optic Cable
MSDP
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol
MUX
Multiplexer
NAK
Negative Acknowledgment
NC
Normally Closed
NCP
Network Control Protocol
NE
Network Element
NEBS
Network Equipment Building System
NEC
National Electrical Code
NI
Network Interface
NLPID
Network Layer Protocol Identifier
NMS
Network Management System
NO
Normally Opened
NOC
Network Operations Center
NSA
Nonservice Affecting
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
NSSA
Not-So-Stubby Area
NTP
Network Time Protocol
NUD
Neighbor Unreachability Detection
NVT
Network Virtual Terminal
OAM&P
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
ODBC
Open Database Connectivity
OS
Operating System
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
Acronyms-6
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
OSS
Operating Support System
PAD
Packet Assembler Disassembler
PAP
Password Authentication Protocol
PBX
Private Branch eXchange
PC
Personal Computer
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
PID
Private ID or password
PMC
PCI Mezzanine Card
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
PROM
Programmable Read Only Memory
PSI
Pounds per Square Inch
PUC
Public Utility Commission
PVC
Permanent Virtual Connection
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QoS
Quality of Service
QPLC
Quad Physical Layer Controller
QTAM
Queued Telecommunications Access Method (IBM)
RAM
Random Access Memory
RAM
Router Access Module
RAS
Remote Access Server
RBOC
Regional Bell Operating Company
RCV
Receiver
RD
Routing Domain
Acronyms-7
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
RDP
Router Discovery Protocol
REN
Ringer Equivalence Number
RF
Radio Frequency
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RMON
Remote Network Monitoring Specification
ROM
Read Only Memory
RTS
Request to Send
RXD
Receive Data
SAM
Serial Alarm Module
SAP
Service Advertisement Protocol
SCC
Specialized Common Carrier
SCCS
Switching Center Control System
SCID
SONET Circuit ID
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SG
Signal Ground
SIC
Secure Internal Communication
SID
System Identification number
SKU
Stock Keeping Unit
SLC
Smart Line Card
SLIP
Serial Line Interface Protocol
SMF
Single Mode Fiber
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
Acronyms-8
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
SPF
Shortest Path First
SQL
Structured Query Language
STP
Shielded Twisted Pair
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
SVC
Switched Virtual Connection
TACACS
Terminal Access Controller Access System
TARP
TID Address Resolution Protocol
TBOS
Telemetry Byte Oriented Serial
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol over Internet Protocol
TCP/UDP
User Datagram Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TDMA
Time Division Multiple Access
TELCO
Telephone Company
TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TID
Target Identifier
TL1
Transaction Language One
TOS
Type of Service
TTL
Time to Live
TXD
Transmit Data
UA
Unnumbered Acknowledgement
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
UTC
Universal Coordinated Time
Acronyms-9
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)
Acronym
Meaning
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
VC
Virtual Channel
VLAN
Virtual LAN
VPN
Virtual Private Network
VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
VT
Virtual Terminal
WAN
Wide Area Network
WINSLC
Window to a Smart Line Card
XKMS
XML Key Management Specification
XNS
Xerox Network Services
ZIP
Zone Information Protocol
Acronyms-10